Breeze Access VL Ver.5.5 System Manual - 081124

BreezeACCESS ® VL
System Manual
Software Version 5.5
December 2008
P/N 215159
Document History
Document History
Topic Description Version/Date Issued

FIPS 197 Optional support (under license) of FIPS SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Sections: 4.2.5.8.3, 4.2.6.7 197 compliant encryption
4.9 GHz B&B models AU/SU with 25dBi antennas for SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section: 1.5, 1.7.1, 1.8.5.1.1 point-to-point links in the 4.9 GHz band
, 1.8.5.4.1
AUS functionality change AUS can support up to 8 SU 3/SU 6 units SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section: 1.2, 4.2.6.2.12 (increased from 5)
IDU-ODU Cable Update of maximum length of IDU-ODU SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section 2.1.2 cable
Frequency configuration Improved mechanism for automatic SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section 4.2.6.2.3.1, 4.2.6.2. detection of frequency/bandwidth.
5
Removed parameters: Sub Band select
(SU), Frequency Subset Definition (SU).
New parameters: User Defined

Frequency Subsets.
Transmit Power, Maximum Simplified configuration mechanism: A SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Transmit Power single parameter instead of
Section 4.2.6.2.8 per-modulation level parameters.
5.3 FCC limitations Update Tx Power limitations for SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section 4.2.6.2.4.1 compliance with FCC regulations
Per SU Distance Learning New feature SW Version 4.0, July 2006

Section 4.2.5.8.2, 4.2.6.2.10
ATPC Delta from Minimum SNR Default values updated SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Level
Section 4.2.6.2.8.3.4
Tx Control Added option: Ethernet Status Control SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section 4.2.6.2.8.5
Lost Beacons Transmission New feature SW Version 4.0, July 2006

Watchdog Threshold
Section 4.2.6.2.15
Service Provider Link (AN QinQ) New feature SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section 4.2.6.4.1
Service Provider Link option added to
VLAN Link Type.
New parameters: Service Provider VLAN

ID, VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertpe.
BreezeACCESS VL ii System Manual

Document History

MAC Address List Improved functionality. SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section 4.2.6.4.7
New parameter: MAC Address List
Action
Concatenation Improved mechanism. SW Version 4.0, July 2006

Section 4.2.6.5.10
New parameter: Maximum
Concatenated Frame Size.
Removed: Maximum Number of Frames
MIR Changes in values of Downlink MIR for SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Table 4-12 SU 3, SU 6
IP Precedence Threshold Default value updated SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section 4.2.6.6.3.2.2
DSCP Threshold Default value updated SW Version 4.0, July 2006

Section 4.2.6.6.3.2.3
Low Priority Traffic Minimum New feature SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Percent
Section 4.2.6.6.3.4
DRAP support New feature SW Version 4.0, July 2006

Section 4.2.6.6.4
Gateways Table New - display of existing gateways when SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section 4.2.5.4.1 DRAP is enabled.
Wireless Link Prioritization New feature SW Version 4.0, July 2006

Section 4.2.6.6.3.5
FTP Client IP Address Changed functionality (read only, set to SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Sections 4.2.3.11, 4.2.3.12 unit's IP Address)
FTP Server IP Address Changed default to 10.0.0.253 SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Sections 4.2.3.11, 4.2.3.12,
4.2.3.9.4
Number of HW Retries Maximum value was changed from 15 to SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section 4.2.6.5.7 14
Ethernet packet length Updated maximum length SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section 4.2.5.1.1
Basic Parameters Table Updated according to applicable SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Table 3-1 changes (new/removed parameters)
Parameters that are not reset to Updated according to applicable SW Version 4.0, July 2006
default value after Set Complete changes (new/removed parameters)
Factory/Operator Defaults
Table 4-2
BreezeACCESS VL iii System Manual

Document History

Parameters that are not reset to Updated according to applicable SW Version 4.0, July 2006
default value after Set Partial changes (new/removed parameters)
Factory/Operator Defaults
Table 4-3
Basic Configuration Menu Updated according to applicable SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Section 4.2.4 changes (new/removed parameters)
MIB (Appendix E) Updated according to applicable SW Version 4.0, July 2006

changes (new/removed parameters)
Parameters Summary (Appendix Updated according to applicable SW Version 4.0, July 2006
F) changes (new/removed parameters)
Using the Feature License Web Removed (previously Appendix G) - SW Version 4.0, July 2006
Application Available as a separate document.
New Subscriber Unit: SU-A-ODU Added New SU-A-ODU and accessories SW Version 4.0 Rev. B, August
2006
New Subscriber Unit: SU-I Added new unit - SU-I, and accessories SW Version 4.0 Rev. C, August
2006
SU-A-H removed SU-A-H (SU with horizonally polarized SW Version 4.0.27, October 2006
Sections 1.3.1, 1.7.1, 1.8.5.1 integrated antenna) was removed from
.1, 2.1.1.1 products list)
IDU PS1036 removed from Replaced by PS1073 SW Version 4.0.27, October 2006
Manual.
Sections 1.8.5.1, 1.8.5.4, 2.4
, 3.5.2
Q in Q (Service Provider Link) Improved handling of management SW Version 4.0.27, October 2006
improvements. frames. Support of Ethertypes 9100,
Sections 4.2.6.4.1.2, 4.2.6.4 9200 (hex).
.1.3.4, 4.2.6.4.1.8, MIB
(Appendix E), Parameters
Summary (Appendix F)
DRAP UDP Port Default changed to 8171 SW Version 4.0.27, October 2006
Section 4.2.6.6.4.2,
Parameters Summary (Appendix
F)
MIR/CIR parameters of SU-I Updated SW Version 4.0.27, February

Table 4-12, Table 4-13, MIB 2007
(Appendix E), Parameters
AUS supports also SU-I Updated functionality SW Version 4.0.27, February

Section 1.2 2007
BreezeACCESS VL iv System Manual

Document History

Password Recovery New feature - a procedure for password SW Version 4.0.27, February
Section 4.1.1 recovery if password was lost/forgotten. 2007
AP Client IP Address New feature SW Version 4.0.27, February

Sections 4.2.6.3.8, 2007
Table 4-3, MIB (Appendix E),
F)
Noise Immunity Control New feature SW Version 4.0.27, February

Section 4.2.6.2.17, 2007
Table 4-3, Parameters
Show Unit Status Added Country Code, Serial Number SW Version 4.5, June 2007
Section 4.2.2.1 and ATE Test Status
Wireless Rx Events Added Other counter SW Version 4.5, June 2007

Section 4.2.5.1.2
Broadcast Relaying New functionality. Name changed from SW Version 4.5, June 2007
Section 4.2.6.4.5, Parameters Broadcast Relaying to
Summary (Appendix E) Broadcast/Multicast Relaying.
MIR Threshold Percent New MIR/CIR parameter SW Version 4.5, June 2007
Sections 4.2.6.6.2, 4.2.6.6.2
.9, Parameters Summary
(Appendix E)
Station Allowed Option New feature SW Version 4.5, June 2007

Section 4.2.6.4.7, 4.2.6.4.7.
4, Parameters Summary
(Appendix E)
Antenna Compliance Statement New SW Version 4.5, June 2007

(in Legal Rights)
Transmit Power Compliance With New SW Version 4.5, June 2007

Regulations
Section 3.1.2
MIB Appendix (previously Removed (all information is available in SW Version 4.5, June 2007
Appendix E) the MIB text file
Minimum and Maximum Parameters are not Run-Time Updated SW Version 4.5, June 2007
Contention Window parameters (reset required)
Run-Time Update definition,
E)
BreezeACCESS VL v System Manual

Document History

Maximum uplink data rate of SU-I Maximum values of Uplink CIR and MIR, SW Version 4.5, July 2007
has been changed and default value of Uplink MIR, has
Table 4-12, Table 4-13, been changed from 2048 Kbps to 4096
Parameters Summary (Appendix Kbps
E)
SU "aging" mechanism (removal Updated SW Version 4.5, July 2007

from Association Database)
Sections 4.2.2.1, 4.2.5.4.1, 4
.2.6.2.12
Pulse Detection Sensitivity Default has been changed to Low SW Version 4.5, July 2007
Section 4.2.6.2.17.5,
E)
Range of supported modulation Updated description SW Version 4.5, July 2007

levels
Sections 4.2.6.5.4, 4.2.6.5.5
Default value of DFS Minimum 4 for FCC, 8 for other (ETSI) SW Version 4.5, July 2007
Pulses to Detect
Section 4.2.6.2.4.3.6,
E)
FCC Radiation Hazard Warning Updated SW Version 4.5, July 2007

(in Legal Rights)
Usable frequencies limitations, Updated SW Version 4.5, July 2007

Section 4.2.6.2.4.2
Re-apply Country Code Values New feature SW Version 4.5, July 2007
Section 4.2.6.8.2, Appendix A
Basic Parameters Added AP Client IP Address SW Version 4.5, July 2007

Section 4.2.4
DFS Name changed from DFS Option to DFS SW Version 4.5, July 2007
Section 4.2.6.2.4.3.1 Required by Regulations (No/Yes)
Sub-Band Select in SU Added/updated descriptions SW Version 4.5, July 2007

Sections 4.2.6.2.5.1, 4.2.6.2
.14
MIR/CIR Parameters Improved description SW Version 4.5, August 2007
Section 4.2.6.6.2
Frequency Ranges The 5.8 GHz band is up to 5.875 GHz SW Version 4.5, August 2007
Table 1-1, Table 1-7 (actual usable frequencies dependon
Country Code)
BreezeACCESS VL vi System Manual

Document History

Antenna specifications Updated compliance to ETSI standard SW Version 4.5, August 2007
Table 1-7 (EN 302 326-3 V1.2.1 (2007-01)
Limitations on usable frequencies Updated SW Version 4.5, August 2007

in FCC 5.3 GHz band
Sections 3.1.2, 4.2.6.2.4.2
Correct Run-Time update of Unit FTP Server IP Address, FTP Gateway IP SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Control Parameters Address, FTP User Name, FTP
Appendix E - Parameters Password are updated in run-time (reset
Summary, Section E.1.1 not required)
Correct Run-Time update of Air Preferred AU MAC Address, Arbitration SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Interface Parameters Inter-Frame Spacing, Wireless Trap
Appendix E - Parameters Threshold are not updated in run-time
Summary, Section E.1.3 (reset is required).
Sub-Band Select, Frequency, DFS

Required by Regulations, Frequency
Subset Definition, Channel Check Time,
Channel Avoidance Period, SU Waiting
Option, Minimum Pulses to Detect,
Channel Reuse Option, Radar Activity
Assessment Period, Maximum Number
of Detections in Assessment Period, are
updated in run-time (reset is not
required).
Spectrum Analysis parameters are

applicable in run-time (configured per
test)
Correct Run-Time update of MIR: Downlink, MIR: Uplink, CIR: SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Service Parameters Downlink, CIR: Uplink, Maximum Burst
Appendix E - Parameters Duration, MIR Threshold Percent, are
Summary, Section E.1.7 updated in run-time (reset is not
required).
Send Traps Traps are generated and sent only by AU SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.6.3.7 (including traps on behalf of associated
SUs)
Unit Control Menu Re-apply Country Codes Values option SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.3 has been removed (available in Basic
and Advanced Configuration, Country
Code Parameters.
Wi2 IP Address Updated name (was previously AP Client SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.6.3.8 IP Address)
BreezeACCESS VL vii System Manual

Document History

Basic Configuration Menu Added Country Code Parameters SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.4
Country Code Parameters New SW Version 5.0, November 2007

Sections 4.2.6.8, 3.1.2,
Table 3-1
SU-3 and SU-6 units Starting on SW Version 5.0, all units will SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 1.3.1 support a full LAN
AUS An optional license enables support of SW Version 5.0, November 2007

Sections 1.2.1, 1.2.2 SU-54 units
SU "aging" mechanism (removal Updated SW Version 5.0, November 2007

from Association Database)
Sections 4.2.2.1, 4.2.5.4.1, 4
.2.6.2.12
Maximum Number of Maximum Number of Associations must SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Associations with Data be set to 124 or lower to enable Data
Encryption enabled Encryption
Sections 4.2.6.2.12, 4.2.6.7.
2
MIR and CIR Parameters Updated description of Burst Duration SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.6.6.2 algorithm
RTS Threshold For HW Rev C and higher, the maximum SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.6.5.1 is 4092 bytes. This is also the default for
RTS Threshold in AU.
MAC Address Database in AU Updated the information displayed in the SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.5.4.1 various options
MAC Address Database in SU Updated the displayed information SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.5.4.2
Menu header Updated details of Menu header SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.1.1
Country Code Learning by SU The SU will learn a new Country Code SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.6.2.4.4 only if it is running from the Main version.
The default has been changed to

Disable.
Show Unit Status New read-only indications: SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.2.1
SU-54 Support (AUS)
Wireless Link Prioritization Support

(AU)
BreezeACCESS VL viii System Manual

Document History

Management Solutions BreezeCONFIG has been replaced by SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 1.7.1 AlvariCRAFT
Set Complete/Partial Defaults Selected Country Code does not change SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Table 4-2,Table 4-3 after Set Complete/Partial Defaults
Feature License Added note on potential copy/paste SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.3.10 problems
AIFS Range has been increased from 1-2 to SW Version 5.0, November 2007
Section 4.2.6.2.11 1-50 time slots.
Data Encryption Option AU with Data Encryption Option enabled SW Version 5.0, December 2007
Section 4.2.6.7.2 can accept non-encrypted data frames
(previously it was stated that this is
applicable only for SU)
Low Priority AIFS The range has been changed from 3-254 SW Version 5.0, December 2007
Section 4.2.6.6.3.5.2 to 3-50.
MIR Defaults Default value for SU-54 have been SW Version 5.0, December 2007
Table 4-12 updated (53,888)
Regulation Max EIRP Updated (New Country Codes, updated SW Version 5.0, December 2007
Table 3-2 values for UK 5.8 GHz)
Scanning Mode Updated description (set to passive if SW Version 5.0, December 2007
Section 4.2.6.2.7 DFS supported by Country Code)
Pulse Detection Sensitivity Updated description. SW Version 5.0, December 2007

Section 4.2.6.2.17.5
Noise Immunity Control Updated: Available only in units with HW SW Version 5.0, December 2007
Section 4.2.6.2.17 Revision C and higher, except to Pulse
Detection Sensitivity that is available
also in units with HW Revision B.
Antenna Gain Range updated. SW Version 5.0, December 2007

Section 4.2.6.2.9
900 MHz Band New Radio Band and relevant products SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Sections 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 1.3.1,
2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.4, 2.3.2, 2.3.
5.3, 3.2, Table 1-1,
Table 1-7, Table 1-11,
Table 1-19, Table 3-2
Protecting ODU Connections New SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Section 2.3.3
MAC Address Database in AU, In Display Association Info, RSSI info SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Section 4.2.5.4.1 has been added (per SU)
BreezeACCESS VL ix System Manual

Document History

Continuous Noise Floor Display New feature SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Sections 4.2.5.3.2 (SU),
4.2.5.5 (AU)
Continuous Average SNR/RSSI Average RSSI has been added to the SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Display in SU display. Added formula used for
Section 4.2.5.3.1 calculations.
Spectrum Analysis Information Added new parameters (OFDM SNR, SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Display OFDM Max SNR, Noise Floor Avg,
Section 4.2.6.2.14.6 Noise Floor Max)
Show Spectrum Analysis Updated manual SW Version 5.1, April 2008

Parameters & Data
Section 4.2.6.2.14.8
Show Best AU Parameters and RSSI of the received signal has been SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Data added
Section 4.2.6.2.6.4
ATPC Delta from Minimum SNR Added default value for 0.9 GHz band SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Level
Section 4.2.6.2.8.3.4
MIR/CIR ranges and defaults Added values for SU-8 SW Version 5.1, April 2008
SU-54 Support, SU-8 Support Updated description of SU-54 Support SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Section 4.2.2.1 by AUS. AUS can support also SU-8
(new product).
RTS Threshold Default value for AU in the 900 MHz SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Section 4.2.6.5.1 band is 60
New SU-A-ODU Updated SW Version 5.1, April 2008

Figure 2-3
AU types AU-D models (supplied with a detached SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Sections 1.2, 1.7.1, 1.8.5.3, antenna) are no longer available. Only
1.8.5.4, 2.1.1.2.2, 2.1.1.3 AU-E models are available (antennas
are sold separately)
Noise Floor Calculation New feature SW Version 5.1, April 2008

Section 4.2.6.2.18,
Table 4-3
Appendix E - Parameters Updated to reflect all SW version 5.1 SW Version 5.1, April 2008
Summary changes
SU-V New product SW Version 5.2, May 2008

Table 4-13
BreezeACCESS VL x System Manual

Document History

Hidden ESSID New feature SW Version 5.2, May 2008`
Sections 4.2.2.1, 4.2.6.2.2, 4
.2.4.4, 4.2.5.6, Table 1-9,
DFS in Universal Country Codes New feature SW Version 5.2, May 2008
in the 5.4 and 5.8 GHz band.
Sections 4.2.6.2.4.3, 4.2.6.2
.4.3.8, 4.2.2.4, Table 3-1
DFS Required By Regulations Updated default: Yes for Country Codes SW Version 5.2, May 2008
Section 4.2.6.2.4.3.1 where required by regulations, No for
Universal Country Codes in the 5.4 and
5.8 GHz bands
Protecting ODU Connections New SW Version 5.2, May 2008

Section 2.3.3
Calibration of Noise Floor New feature SW Version 5.2, May 2008

Indication
Section 4.2.6.2.19
Appendix E - Parameters Updated to reflect all SW version 5.2 SW Version 5.2, May 2008
Summary changes
AU-ODU types New table reflecting the new 0.9 MHz AU SW Version 5.2, June 2008
Table 1-2, Table 2-2, ODU.
Table 2-3
SU-ODU types Updated (more details) SW Version 5.2, June 2008
AU-E-ODU mechanical Updated to reflect new 0.9 GHz ODU SW Version 5.2, June 2008
specifications
Packing Lists Updated to reflect new 0.9 GHz AU-ODU SW Version 5.2, June 2008
Sections 2.1.1.2.2, 2.1.1.3, 2
.1.1.4
ODU Installation Updated to reflect new 0.9 GHz AU-ODU SW Version 5.2, June 2008
Section 2.3
Maximum Output Power Updated (27 dBm for 0.9 GHz units) SW Version 5.2, June 2008
Table 1-7
RESET Button Functionality Updated SW Version 5.2, June 2008
Section 2.4.1
Association Database in AU Updated: Association SNAP from SW Version 5.2, June 2008
Sections 4.2.2.1, 4.2.5.4.1, 4 another AU is not used for removal of SU
.2.6.2.12 from the database.
BreezeACCESS VL xi System Manual

Document History

SU Unit Status Updated (added AUTHENTICATING SW Version 5.2, June 2008
Section 4.2.2.1 status)
MAC Address List Corrected (supplier's OUI is 00-10-E7) SW Version 5.2, June 2008
Section 4.2.6.4.7
File Loading Updated: A known parameter with a SW Version 5.2, June 2008
Appendix B value that is invalid or out of range will be
ignored
Ethernet Port Connection Updated SW Version 5.2, June 2008

Problems
Section F.2
Packing Lists Updated (clarified that RF cable is not SW Version 5.2, June 2008
Section 2.1.1 supplied with SU/AU-E-ODUs)
Antenna Alignment Updated and improved SW Version 5.2, July 2008

Section 3.3
Equipment Positioning Minimum distance of 10 cm between the SW Version 5.2, July 2008
Guidelines ODU and antenna.
Section 2.2
Compatibility with New SW Version 5.5, October 2008

BreezeACCESS EZ SUs
Section 1.4
Radio standards updated Updated SW Version 5.5, October 2008

Table 1-10
SU-1_BD added New SW Version 5.5, October 2008
Table 4-13, Table F-2
SU-1_BD added New SW Version 5.5, October 2008
Section E.1.7
BreezeACCESS VL xii System Manual

Legal Rights
Legal Rights
© Copyright 2008 Alvarion Ltd. All rights reserved.
The material contained herein is proprietary, privileged, and confidential and

owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors. No disclosure thereof shall be made
to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd.
Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and
descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication
shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically
incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
Trade Names
Alvarion®, BreezeCOM®, WALKair®, WALKnet®, BreezeNET®, BreezeACCESS®,
BreezeLINK®, BreezeMAX®, BreezeLITE®, BreezePHONE®, 4Motion®,
BreezeCONFIG™, AlvariSTAR™, AlvariCRAFT™, MGW™, eMGW™ and/or other
products and/or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks,
trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd.
All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Alvarion Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of
this manual or equipment supplied with it.
Warranties and Disclaimers

All Alvarion Ltd. ("Alvarion") products purchased from Alvarion or through any of
Alvarion's authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product
liability terms and conditions.
Exclusive Warranty
(a) Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible
media on which any software is installed, under normal use and conditions, will
be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
fourteen (14) months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser
(the "Warranty Period"). Alvarion will, at its sole option and as Purchaser's sole
remedy, repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion'
standard R&R procedure.
(b) With respect to the Firmware, Alvarion warrants the correct functionality
according to the attached documentation, for a period of fourteen (14) month from
BreezeACCESS VL xiii System Manual

Legal Rights
invoice date (the "Warranty Period")". During the Warranty Period, Alvarion may
release to its Customers firmware updates, which include additional performance
improvements and/or bug fixes, upon availability (the "Warranty"). Bug fixes,
temporary patches and/or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates.
Additional hardware, if required, to install or use Firmware updates must be

purchased by the Customer. Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two (2)
most recent Software major releases.
ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING

AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT
DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER'S OR ANY THIRD
PERSON'S MISUSE, NEGLIGENCE, IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER
TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE
BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE,
LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD.
Disclaimer
(a) The Product is sold on an "AS IS" basis. Alvarion, its affiliates or its licensors
MAKE NO WARRANTIES, WHATSOEVER, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING
DOCUMENTATION. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE.
UNITS OF PRODUCT (INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE) DELIVERED TO
PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT-TOLERANT AND ARE NOT
DESIGNED, MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN
APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE, MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF
PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE
PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE ("HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES"). HIGH
RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, USE AS PART OF
ON-LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING
FAIL-SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR
FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR
TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES, WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR
OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL
HAZARD. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
(b) PURCHASER'S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS

WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE
PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE, AT ALVARION'S OPTION. TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET
FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
BreezeACCESS VL xiv System Manual

Legal Rights
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EITHER IN FACT OR BY

OPERATION OF LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES, TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND
ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED. ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMED. ALVARION' WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER,
AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES. ALVARION NEITHER
ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY
OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION,
MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS.
Limitation of Liability
(a) ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY, FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, INTERRUPTION OF
BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER ARISING UNDER
BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY
OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR
OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
(b) TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL

THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES
OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY
PURCHASER, NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL
PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID
FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY (EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF
A PARTY'S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS).
Electronic Emission Notices

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference.
2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement

The Subscriber Unit equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to ETSI
EN 301 489-1 rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential
BreezeACCESS VL xv System Manual

Legal Rights
environment notwithstanding use in commercial, business and industrial

environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
The Base Station equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to EN 301
489-1 rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in commercial, business
and industrial environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
the user's own expense.
FCC Radiation Hazard Warning

To comply with FCC RF exposure requirement, the antenna used for this
transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a
separation distance of at least 2 meter from al persons for antennas with a gain
up to 28 dBi.
Antenna Compliance Statement

This device has been designed to operate with the antennas listed in Table 1-3,
and having a maximum gain of 28dbi. Antennas not included in this list or having
a gain greater than 28dBi are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The
required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its
gain should be so chosen that the Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power (EIRP)
is not more than that permitted for successful communication.
R&TTE Compliance Statement

This equipment complies with the appropriate essential requirements of Article 3
of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.
Safety Considerations
For the following safety considerations, "Instrument" means the BreezeACCESS
VL units' components and their cables.
Caution
To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to
do so.
BreezeACCESS VL xvi System Manual

Legal Rights
Line Voltage
Before connecting this instrument to the power line, make sure that the voltage of
the power source matches the requirements of the instrument.
Radio
The instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation. To avoid possible
harmful exposure to this energy, do not stand or work for extended periods of time
in front of its antenna. The long-term characteristics or the possible physiological
effects of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic fields have not been yet fully
investigated.
Outdoor Unit and Antenna Installation and Grounding

Ensure that outdoor units, antennas and supporting structures are properly
installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property. Make sure
that the installation of the outdoor unit, antenna and cables is performed in
accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes. Even
where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and national
codes, it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna
mast (when using external antenna) are grounded and suitable lightning
protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and
static charges. In any event, Alvarion is not liable for any injury, damage or
regulation violations associated with or caused by installation, grounding or
lightning protection.
Disposal of Electronic and Electrical Waste
Disposal of Electronic and Electrical Waste

Pursuant to the WEEE EU Directive electronic and electrical waste must not be disposed of with
unsorted waste. Please contact your local recycling authority for disposal of this product.
BreezeACCESS VL xvii System Manual

Important Notice
Important Notice
This user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:
This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd. Such

information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized
users of the respective Alvarion products.
No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose, disclosed to any
person or firm or reproduced by any means, electronic and mechanical,
without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd.
The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only.
The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without
notice.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license. The

software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that
license.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are
fictitious unless otherwise noted.
Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and
descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this
publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless
specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does not
constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein.
Any changes or modifications of equipment, including opening of the

equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd. will void equipment
warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for. It could also void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Some of the equipment provided by Alvarion and specified in this manual, is

manufactured and warranted by third parties. All such equipment must be
installed and handled in full compliance with the instructions provided by such
manufacturers as attached to this manual or provided thereafter by Alvarion or
BreezeACCESS VL xviii System Manual

Important Notice
the manufacturers. Non compliance with such instructions may result in serious
damage and/or bodily harm and/or void the user's authority to operate the
equipment and/or revoke the warranty provided by such manufacturer.
BreezeACCESS VL xix System Manual

About this Manual
About this Manual
This manual describes the BreezeACCESS VL Broadband Wireless Access System

Release 5.5 and how to install, operate and manage the system components.
This manual is intended for technicians responsible for installing, setting up and
operating the BreezeACCESS VL system, and for system administrators
responsible for managing the system.
This manual contains the following chapters and appendices:
Chapter 1 - System description: Describes the BreezeACCESS VL system and

its components.
Chapter 2 - Installation: Describes how to install the system components.
Chapter 3 - Commissioning: Describes how to configure basic parameters,

align the Subscriber Unit antenna and validate unit operation.
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration: Describes how to use the

BreezeACCESS VL Monitor application for configuring parameters, checking
system status and monitoring performance.
Appendix A - Software Version Loading Using TFTP: Describes how to load a

new software version using TFTP.
Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP: Describes how to

download and upload configuration files using TFTP. This procedure is also
applicable for uploading country code and feature license files.
Appendix C - Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility: Describes how to use the
Set Factory Defaults utility to enable management access to units where
wrong or unknown configuration disables regular access to the unit for
management purposes.
Appendix D - Preparing the indoor to outdoor SU cable: Provides details on

preparation of the indoor to outdoor Ethernet cable.
Appendix E - Parameters Summary: Provides an at a glance summary of the

configuration parameters, value ranges and default values.
BreezeACCESS VL xx System Manual

About this Manual
Appendix F - Troubleshooting.
BreezeACCESS VL xxi System Manual

Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 - System Description .............................................................. 1
1.1 Introducing BreezeACCESS VL ................................................................................3
1.2 Base Station Equipment ............................................................................................5
1.2.1 Modular Base Station Equipment........................................................................5

1.2.2 Standalone "Micro-cell" Access Unit ...................................................................7
1.3 Subscriber Unit...........................................................................................................9
1.3.1 SU-A/E Subscriber Units.....................................................................................9

1.3.2 SU-I Subscriber Units........................................................................................11
1.3.3 The SU-E-BS ....................................................................................................11
1.4 BreezeACCESS EZ Compatibility ...........................................................................13
1.5 BreezeACCESS VL B&B (4.9 GHz only) .................................................................14
1.6 Networking Equipment ............................................................................................15
1.7 Management Systems..............................................................................................16
1.7.1 AlvariCRAFT .....................................................................................................16

1.7.2 AlvariSTAR........................................................................................................17
1.8 Specifications ...........................................................................................................18
1.8.1 Radio.................................................................................................................18
1.8.2 Data Communication.........................................................................................20
1.8.3 Configuration and Management........................................................................20
1.8.4 Standards Compliance, General .......................................................................21
1.8.5 Physical and Electrical ......................................................................................22
1.8.6 Environmental ...................................................................................................28
Chapter 2 - Installation.......................................................................... 29
2.1 Installation Requirements .......................................................................................31
2.1.1 Packing List.......................................................................................................31
BreezeACCESS VL xxii System Manual

Contents
2.1.2 Indoor-to-Outdoor Cables .................................................................................34

2.2 Equipment Positioning Guidelines.........................................................................36
2.3 Installing the Outdoor Unit ......................................................................................38
2.3.1 Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit........................................................................38

2.3.2 Pole Mounting the New ODU ............................................................................40
2.3.3 Protecting ODU Connections ............................................................................44
2.3.4 Connecting the Grounding and Antenna Cables...............................................45
2.3.5 Connecting the Indoor-to-Outdoor Cable ..........................................................47
2.4 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit.................................................................50
2.4.1 RESET Button Functionality..............................................................................51

2.5 Installing the SU-I .....................................................................................................52
2.5.1 Installation Requirements..................................................................................52

2.5.2 SU-I Connectors and LEDs...............................................................................53
2.5.3 Installation Guidelines .......................................................................................54
2.5.4 Installing the SU-I..............................................................................................55
2.5.5 Installing the Detached Antenna .......................................................................55
2.6 Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment....................................................62
2.6.1 BS-SH Slot Assignment ....................................................................................62

2.6.2 BS-PS-AC Power Supply Module .....................................................................63
2.6.3 BS-PS-DC Power Supply Module .....................................................................64
2.6.4 BS-AU Network Interface Module .....................................................................65
2.6.5 Installing the BS-SH Chassis and Modules.......................................................66
Chapter 3 - Commissioning ................................................................... 68
3.1 Configuring Basic Parameters................................................................................70
3.1.1 Initial Configuration ...........................................................................................70

3.1.2 Country Code Selection ....................................................................................72
3.1.3 Transmit Power Compliance With Regulations .................................................72
3.2 Using the Optional Y-cable (New SU A/E ODU).....................................................75
3.3 Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna ...................................................................76
3.4 Configuring the Subscriber Unit's Maximum Modulation Level ..........................78
3.5 Operation Verification..............................................................................................80
3.5.1 Outdoor Unit Verification ...................................................................................80
BreezeACCESS VL xxiii System Manual

Contents
3.5.2 Indoor Unit Verification......................................................................................82

3.5.3 SU-I Unit Verification.........................................................................................83
3.5.4 Verifying the Ethernet Connection (Modular Base station) ...............................84
3.5.5 Verifying the Indoor-to-Outdoor Connection (Modular Base Station)................84
3.5.6 Verifying Data Connectivity ...............................................................................84
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration ............................................ 85
4.1 Working with the Monitor Program ........................................................................87
4.1.1 Accessing the Monitor Program Using Telnet...................................................87

4.1.2 Common Operations .........................................................................................88
4.2 Menus and Parameters ............................................................................................90
4.2.1 Main Menu ........................................................................................................90

4.2.2 Info Screens Menu ............................................................................................90
4.2.3 Unit Control Menu .............................................................................................96
4.2.4 Basic Configuration Menu ...............................................................................110
4.2.5 Site Survey Menu............................................................................................113
4.2.6 Advanced Configuration Menu........................................................................128
Appendix A - Software Version Loading Using TFTP ........................ 212
Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP ........................ 216
Appendix C - Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility ......................... 219
Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable .................. 221
Appendix E - Parameters Summary ................................................... 224
E.1 Parameters Summary ............................................................................................226
E.1.1 Unit Control Parameters..................................................................................226

E.1.2 IP Parameters .................................................................................................227
E.1.3 Air Interface Parameters .................................................................................227
E.1.4 Network Management Parameters .................................................................231
E.1.5 Bridge Parameters ..........................................................................................232
E.1.6 Performance Parameters ................................................................................234
E.1.7 Service Parameters.........................................................................................236
E.1.8 Security Parameters........................................................................................238
BreezeACCESS VL xxiv System Manual

Contents
Appendix F - Troubleshooting ............................................................ 240
F.2 Ethernet Port Connection Problems ....................................................................241
F.3 SU Association Problems......................................................................................242
F.4 Low Throughput Problems....................................................................................243
BreezeACCESS VL xxv System Manual

Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1: SU-A-ODU and IDU .................................................................................................. 10

Figure 1-2: New SU-A-ODU ........................................................................................................ 10
Figure 2-1: Threaded Holes/Grooves.......................................................................................... 39
Figure 2-2: 3" Pole Installation Using Special Clamps ................................................................ 39
Figure 2-3: Back View of the new SU-A-ODU............................................................................. 41
Figure 2-4: New SU-A-ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp, Vertical Polarization ... 42
Figure 2-5: New SU-A-ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp, Horizontal Polarization43
Figure 2-6: New ODU Pole Installation Using the Tilt Accessory, Vertical Polarization .............. 44
Figure 2-7: Bottom Panel of the ODU
(all ODUs except to new ODU, shown without the sealing assembly) ........................................ 46
Figure 2-8: Bottom Panel of the New SU-A-ODU (without IDU COM Sealing Cap) ................... 46
Figure 2-9: Bottom Panel of the New 0.9 GHz ODU (without the IDU COM Sealing Cap) ......... 46
Figure 2-10: The Waterproof Seal............................................................................................... 47
Figure 2-11: Inserting the IDU COM Cable into the Sealing Cap................................................ 49
Figure 2-12: Connecting the IDU COM connector and inserting the Sealing Cap ...................... 49
Figure 2-13: IDU PS 1073 Front Panel ....................................................................................... 50
Figure 2-14: SU-I Panel .............................................................................................................. 53
Figure 2-15: Wall Mounting the Antenna..................................................................................... 57
Figure 2-16: Wall Mount with Rotation Capability ....................................................................... 59
Figure 2-17: Window Mounting the Antenna ............................................................................... 60
Figure 2-18: Window Mounting with Rotation Capability............................................................. 61
Figure 2-19: BS-SH Chassis Slot Assignment ............................................................................ 62
Figure 2-20: BS-PS-AC Front Panel ........................................................................................... 63
Figure 2-21: BS-PS-DC Front Panel ........................................................................................... 64
Figure 2-22: BS-AU Front Panel ................................................................................................. 65
Figure 3-1: Connecting the Y-cable............................................................................................. 75
Figure 4-1: Main Menu (Administrator Level) .............................................................................. 88
BreezeACCESS VL xxvi System Manual

Figures
Figure 4-2: Service Provider Link .............................................................................................. 173

Figure D-1: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments .................................................................... 222
BreezeACCESS VL xxvii System Manual

Tables
Tables
Table 1-1: Frequency Bands ......................................................................................................... 4
Table 1-2: Access Unit ODU Types .............................................................................................. 6
Table 1-3: AU Antennas ................................................................................................................ 6
Table 1-4: Subscriber Unit ODU Types......................................................................................... 9
Table 1-5: SU-A/E Subscriber Unit Types................................................................................... 10
Table 1-6: SU-I Subscriber Units................................................................................................. 11
Table 1-7: Radio Specifications................................................................................................... 18
Table 1-8: Data Communication.................................................................................................. 20
Table 1-9: Configuration and Management................................................................................. 20
Table 1-10: Standards Compliance, General .............................................................................. 21
Table 1-11: Mechanical Specifications, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit ................................................ 22
Table 1-12: Connectors, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit ....................................................................... 23
Table 1-13: Electrical Specifications, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit.................................................... 23
Table 1-14: Mechanical and Electrical Specifications, SU-I Subscriber Unit .............................. 23
Table 1-15: Connectors, SU-I Subscriber Unit ............................................................................ 24
Table 1-16: Mechanical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment ................................. 24
Table 1-17: Connectors, Modular Base Station Equipment ........................................................ 25
Table 1-18: Electrical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment..................................... 25
Table 1-19: Mechanical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit .............................................. 26
Table 1-20: Connectors, Stand Alone Access Unit ..................................................................... 26
Table 1-21: Electrical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit.................................................. 27
Table 1-22: 25dBi Antenna Specifications .................................................................................. 27
Table 1-23: SU-I-D Wall/Window Detached Antenna Specifications .......................................... 27
BreezeACCESS VL xxviii System Manual

Tables
Table 1-24: Environmental Specifications ................................................................................... 28
Table 2-1: Subscriber Unit ODU Types....................................................................................... 31
Table 2-2: Access Unit ODU Types ............................................................................................ 32
Table 2-3: Access Unit ODU Types ............................................................................................ 33
Table 2-4: Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables .................................................................... 34
Table 2-5: SU-I Panel Components ............................................................................................ 53
Table 2-6: BS-PS LED Functionality ........................................................................................... 63
Table 3-1: Basic Parameters....................................................................................................... 70
Table 3-2: Regulation Maximum EIRP ........................................................................................ 73
Table 3-3: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level*............................................................. 79
Table 3-4: AU-ODU LEDs ........................................................................................................... 80
Table 3-5: SU-ODU LEDs ........................................................................................................... 81
Table 3-6: SU-ODU SNR Bar LED Functionality......................................................................... 81
Table 3-7: BS-AU LEDs .............................................................................................................. 82
Table 3-8: PS1073 SU IDU / AU-SA IDU LEDs .......................................................................... 83
Table 3-9: SU-I LEDs .................................................................................................................. 83
Table 3-10: SU-I SNR Bar LED Functionality.............................................................................. 84
Table 4-1: Default Passwords ..................................................................................................... 87
Table 4-2: Parameters not changed after Set Complete Factory/Operator Defaults .................. 98
Table 4-3: Parameters that are not changed after Set Partial Factory/Operator Defaults .......... 99
Table 4-4: Authentication and Association Process .................................................................. 123
Table 4-5: VLAN Management Port Functionality ..................................................................... 170
Table 4-6: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Access Link ............................................................ 171
Table 4-7: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Trunk Link .............................................................. 172
Table 4-8: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Hybrid Link ............................................................. 172
Table 4-9: VLAN Data Port Functionality for SU - Service Provider Link .................................. 173
BreezeACCESS VL xxix System Manual

Tables
Table 4-10: VLAN Data Port Functionality for AU - Service Provider Link ................................ 174
Table 4-11: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level*......................................................... 187
Table 4-12: MIR Ranges and Defaults ...................................................................................... 196
Table 4-13: CIR Ranges and Defaults ...................................................................................... 197
Table D-1: Cable Color Codes .................................................................................................. 222
Table F-2: Expected Throughput in Mbps, TCP Traffic @ 20 MHz Bandwidth,

Burst Mode Enabled, Concatenation Enabled .......................................................................... 243
Table F-3: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level* .......................................................... 244
BreezeACCESS VL xxx System Manual

Chapter 1
System Description
Chapter 1 - System Description
In this Chapter:
“Introducing BreezeACCESS VL” on page 3
“Base Station Equipment” on page 5
“Subscriber Unit” on page 9
“BreezeACCESS EZ Compatibility” on page 13
“BreezeACCESS VL B&B (4.9 GHz only)” on page 14
“Networking Equipment” on page 15
“Management Systems” on page 16
“Specifications” on page 18
BreezeACCESS VL 2 System Manual

Chapter 1 - System Description Introducing BreezeACCESS VL
1.1 Introducing BreezeACCESS VL
BreezeACCESS VL is a high capacity, IP services oriented Broadband Wireless

Access system. The system employs wireless packet switched data technology to
support high-speed IP services including fast Internet and Virtual Private
Networks.BreezeACCESS VL users are provided with a network connection that is
always on, supporting immediate access to the Internet and other IP services at
high data rates. The system is designed for cellular-like deployment, enabling the
system architecture to vary in size and structure. A system can include any
number of cells, each containing several Access Units for better coverage of
densely populated areas.
BreezeACCESS VL can support sensitive applications through authentication

and/or data encryption utilizing WEP or AES algorithm with 128 bit keys. FIPS
(Federal Information Processing Standards) 197 certified encryption algorithm is
available free of charge for all BreezeACCESS VL Access Units with HW revision C
and higher (except to AUS units). The system supports Virtual LANs based on
IEEE 802.1Q, enabling secure operation and Virtual Private Network (VPN)
services and enabling tele-workers or remote offices to conveniently access their
enterprise network. The system supports layer-2 traffic prioritization based on
IEEE 802.1p and layer-3 traffic prioritization based on either IP ToS Precedence
(RFC791) or DSCP (RFC2474). It also supports traffic prioritization based on UDP
and/or TCP port ranges. In addition, it may use the optional Wireless Link
Prioritization (WLP) feature to fully support delay sensitive applications, enabling
Multimedia Application Prioritization (MAP) for high performance voice and video.
The implementation of MAP through the unique WLP protocol revolutionizes the
business model by increasing, for example, the number of simultaneous VoIP
calls per sector by as much as 500%.
BreezeACCESS VL products operate in unlicensed frequency bands in Time

Division Duplex (TDD) mode, using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
(OFDM) modulation with Forward Error Correction (FEC) coding. Using the
enhanced multi-path resistance capabilities of OFDM modem technology,
BreezeACCESS VL enables operation in near and non line of sight (NLOS)
environments. These qualities enable service providers to reach a previously
inaccessible and broader segment of the subscriber population.
BreezeACCESS VL is designed to enable construction of "mixed" cells, where it

can be used together with other BreezeACCESS products using GFSK modulation,
including BreezeACCESS II, BreezeACCESS MMDS, BreezeACCESS XL,
BreezeACCESS V and BreezeACCESS EZ.

Chapter 1 - System Description Introducing BreezeACCESS VL
Table 1-1: Frequency Bands
Band Frequencies (MHz)

4.9 4900 – 5100
5.2 5150 – 5350
5.3 5250 – 5350
5.4 5470 – 5725
5.8 5725 – 5875
The available frequencies, as well as other parameters, depend on applicable local

regulations. The actual operating frequencies used by the system can be
configured according to applicable radio regulations and specific deployment
considerations.
A BreezeACCESS VL system comprises the following:
Customer Premise Equipment (CPE): BreezeACCESS VL Subscriber Units

(SUs).
Base Station Equipment (BS): BreezeACCESS VL Access Units and

supporting equipment.
Networking Equipment: Standard Switches/Routers supporting connections

to the backbone and/or Internet.
Management Systems: SNMP-based Management, Billing and Customer

Care, and other Operation Support Systems.

Chapter 1 - System Description Base Station Equipment
1.2 Base Station Equipment
The Access Units, installed at the Base Station site, provide all the functionality
necessary to communicate with the Subscriber Units and to connect to the
backbone of the Service Provider.
There are 2 lines of Access Units with different architectures:
Modular Base Station Equipment
Standalone "Micro-Cell" Access Unit
1.2.1 Modular Base Station Equipment

The Base Station Equipment is based on
the BS-SH 3U chassis, which is suitable
for installation in 19-inch racks. The
chassis contains one or two Power
Supply modules and has 8 slots that can
accommodate BS-AU Network Interface
modules. These slots can also accommodate various combinations of other
modules, including Network Interface (BS-AU) modules for Access Units operating
in any of the bands supported by BreezeACCESS equipment using GFSK
modulation, including BreezeACCESS II, BreezeACCESS MMDS, BreezeACCESS
XL and BreezeACCESS V. It can also accommodate a BS-GU GPS and Alarms
module to support GPS-based synchronization of BreezeACCESS systems using
Frequency Hopping radios.
Two different types of power supply modules are available for the BreezeACCESS
VL modules: The BS-PS-DC that is powered from a -48 VDC power source, and
the BS-PS-AC, powered from the 110/240 VAC mains. The optional use of two
power supply modules ensures fail-safe operation through power supply
redundancy. When the same chassis is used also for Access Unit modules
belonging to other BreezeACCESS families using GFSK modulation, then one
BS-PS power supply (AC or DC) should be used to provide power to the
BreezeACCESS VL Access Units, and a different power supply module, suitable for
GFSK equipment, is required for powering the BreezeACCESS GFSK Access Units.
Each BS-AU module and its outdoor radio unit (AU-ODU) comprise an AU-E-BS
Access Unit that together with an external antenna serve a single sector. There are
two types of Access Units, differing in the maximum number of Subscriber Units
that they can serve:

The AU-BS Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units (124 when Data
Encryption is used).
The AUS-BS Access Unit can serve up to 8 SUs except SU-54 (refer to section
1.3 for details on availability of SU types in different bands). Optionally, it may
be licensed to support also SU-54 units (in bands where SU-54 unit type is
available.).
NOTE
For convenience, all references to AU-BS are applicable also for AUS-BS, unless explicitly stated
otherwise.
The AU-ODU outdoor unit contains the processing and radio modules
and connects to an external antenna using a short RF cable.
There are two types of AU-ODUs:
Table 1-2: Access Unit ODU Types
AU ODU Type Description

AU-E-ODU A rectangular enclosure (30.5 x 11.7 x 5.7 cm) with a connection to
an external antenna (not included). Not available in the 0.9 GHz
band (HW revision D or lower).
New AU-E-ODU A diamond shaped enclosure (22 x 22 x 7 cm) with a connection to

an external antenna (not included).
E model units are supplied without an antenna.
The available antennas are listed in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3: AU Antennas
Antenna Band (MHz) Horizontal Gain (dBi)

Beam Width
AU-Ant-5G-16-60 5150-5875 60° 16
AU-Ant-5G-17-90 5150-5875 90° 17

Table 1-3: AU Antennas
Antenna Band (MHz) Horizontal Gain (dBi)

Beam Width
AU-Ant-5G-15-120 5150-5875 120° 15
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120 4900-5100 120° 15
AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni 4900-5100 360° 9
AU-Ant-5.8G-8-Omni 5725-5875 360° 8
AU-Ant 5.8G-14-120-UK (The antenna 5725-5850 120° 14

pattern complies with Ofcom's IR 2007
EIRP profiles)
AU-Ant-0.9G-V/H-10-90 902-928 90° 2x10
The BS-AU indoor module connects to the network through a standard IEEE
802.3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interface. The indoor module is connected to
the outdoor unit via a Category 5E Ethernet cable. This cable carries Ethernet
traffic between the indoor module and the outdoor unit, and also transfers power
(54 VDC) and control from the indoor module to the outdoor unit.
1.2.2 Standalone "Micro-cell" Access Unit

The standalone AU-E-SA Access Unit is very similar to the AU-E-BS
unit. The difference is in the structure of the indoor part; in the
AU-E-SA Access Unit the indoor unit is a standalone desktop or
wall-mountable unit (the same Universal IDU that is also used in
the SU) rather than a 19" module.
There are two types of Standalone Access Units, differing in the

maximum number of Subscriber Units that they can serve:
The AU-SA Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units (124 when Data
Encryption is used).
The AUS-SA Access Unit can serve up to 8 SUs except SU-54 (refer to section
1.3 for details on availability of SU types in different bands). Optionally, it may
be licensed to support also SU-54 units (in bands where SU-54 unit type is
available.).
NOTE
For convenience, all references to AU-SA are applicable also for AUS-SA, unless explicitly stated
otherwise.

The IDU connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet
10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interfaces and is powered from the 110/240 VAC mains.
The indoor unit is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5 Ethernet cable.
This cable carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor and the outdoor units, and
also transfers power (54 VDC) and control from the indoor unit to the outdoor
unit.

Chapter 1 - System Description Subscriber Unit
1.3 Subscriber Unit
The Subscriber Unit (SU) installed at the customer premises enables the customer
data connection to the Access Unit. The Subscriber Unit provides an efficient
platform for high speed Internet and Intranet services. The use of packet
switching technology provides the user with a connection to the network that is
always on, enabling immediate access to services.
There are two types of Subscriber Units:
The SU-A/E series, where each unit comprises an Indoor Unit and an Outdoor
Unit (with or without an integrated antenna). These products are intended for
installation by a professional installer, enabling long-range connectivity.
The SU-I series of all-indoor Subscriber Unit, intended for installation by

non-professional end users in locations that are close to the Base Station.
In addition, there is a special variant of a Subscriber Unit, the SU-E-BS, where

the indoor unit is designed for installation in the Base Station chassis. The
SU-E-BS is intended primarily for backhauling or similar applications.
The following sections provide additional details on the various types of

Subscriber Units.
1.3.1 SU-A/E Subscriber Units

The SU-A/E Subscriber Unit comprises a desktop or wall-mountable Indoor Unit
(IDU) and an outdoor unit that contains the processing and radio modules.
Several ODU types are available to support a wide range of requirements, as
detailed in Table 1-4:
Table 1-4: Subscriber Unit ODU Types
SU ODU Type Description

SU-A-ODU A rectangular enclosure plus a diamond shaped vertically
polarized high-gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel
(41.5 x 36.9 x 6.3 cm). Available only for HW revision D or
lower.
New SU-A-ODU A diamond shaped enclosure (22 x 22 x 7 cm) with a

vertically/horizontally polarized high-gain flat antenna
integrated on the front panel.The smaller size new SU-A-ODU
(HW revision E) is currently available only in the 5.4 GHz and
5.8 GHz bands.


SU-E-ODU A rectangular enclosure (30.5 x 11.7 x 5.7 cm) with a
connection to an external antenna (not included). Not
available in the 0.9 GHz band (HW revision D or lower).
New SU-E-ODU A diamond shaped enclosure (22 x 22 x 7 cm) with a

connection to an external antenna (not included).
Figure 1-1: SU-A-ODU and IDU Figure 1-2: New SU-A-ODU
For each ODU type, several models are available to support various end-users
needs and applications, as detailed in Table 1-5:
Table 1-5: SU-A/E Subscriber Unit Types
SU Type Description
SU-54-BD (SU-54) A high-rate CPE that supports a full LAN. Not available in the
900 MHz band.
SU-6-BD (SU-6) A medium rate CPE that supports a full LAN*. Not available in
the 900 MHz band.
SU-3-BD (SU-3) An entry level CPE that supports a full LAN**
SU-1-BD (SU-1) An affordable CPE that supports data throughputs of up to

1Mbps.
SU-8-BD (SU-*) A medium rate CPE that supports a full LAN. Available only in
the 900 MHz band. The SU-8 functionality is available by
loading the relevant feature license to an SU-3 unit.
SU-V A medium rate CPE supporting up to 8 Mbps in the uplink and

2 Mbps in the downlink. Intended primarily for special
applications such as video surveillance where higher uplink
rates are required. Available currently only with the new
SU-A-ODU in the 5.4 and 5.8 GHz bands.
* In the past, SU-6-1D units were also available. After being upgraded to version 5.0 or higher, SU-6-1D
units will automatically be changed to SU-6-BD units.

** In the past, only SU-3-1D and SU-3-4D were available. After being upgraded to version 5.0 or higher,
SU-3-1D/4D units will automatically be changed to SU-3-BD units. (In SNMP, these units will be
reported as SU-3-4D. However, all SU-3 units running SW version 5.0 or higher will behave as SU-3-BD
units, supporting a full LAN).
The IDU provides the interface to the user's equipment and is powered from the
110/240 VAC mains. The customer's data equipment is connected via a standard
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interface. The indoor unit is connected
to the outdoor unit via a Category 5 Ethernet cable. This cable carries Ethernet
traffic between the indoor and the outdoor units, and also transfers power (54
VDC) and control from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit.
1.3.2 SU-I Subscriber Units
The SU-I is a compact Subscriber Unit intended for

indoor installations by a non-professional user. The
SU-I connects to a detached wall/window mountable
antenna, and is available in the following configura-
tions:
Table 1-6: SU-I Subscriber Units
SU-I Configuration Description

SU-I-D All-indoor medium rate CPE supporting a full LAN, and
a wall/window antenna kit
SU-I-E All-indoor medium rate CPE supporting a full LAN

(antenna not included)
The SU-I is currently available in the 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz bands.
NOTE
It is recommended to pre-configure the units prior to shipment to end-users.
1.3.3 The SU-E-BS

The SU-E-BS is a special variant of a Subscriber Unit, where the indoor unit is
designed for installation in the Base Station chassis. The outdoor unit is an
SU-E-ODU, with a connection to an external antenna.

The SU-E-BS is intended primarily for backhauling or similar applications,

including applications where it is used in conjunction with a GFSK-based system.
The functionality of the LEDs of the module is the same as the LEDs of a regular
AU-IDU module (with one minor exception-the W-LNK LED indicates whether the
SU-E is associated with an AU).

Chapter 1 - System Description BreezeACCESS EZ Compatibility
1.4 BreezeACCESS EZ Compatibility
All BreezeACCESS VL access units (AU-BS, AUS-BS, AU-SA and AUS-SA) can be
deployed along with both BreezeACCESS VL and BreezeACCESS EZ subscriber
units. Therefore, a BreezeACCESS VL cell can incorporate a BreezeACCESS VL
access unit and:
One or more BreezeACCESS VL subscriber units
One or more BreezeACCESS EZ subscriber units
Both BreezeACCESS VL and BreezeACCESS EZ subscriber units
NOTE
When deploying SU-EZ in VL cells keep in mind the following:
The SU-A-EZ units’ maximum throughput is limited to 3 Mbps for download and 2 Mbps for
upload when deployed in BreezeACCESS VL sectors as opposed to 12 Mbps for both upload
and download when they are connected to BreezeACCESS EZ access units.
Because SU-A-EZ units don’t support WLP, when deployed in VL cells that are operating in
WLP mode, the AIFS parameter in the SU-EZ must be set up using the same AIFS value that
the AU is using for the low priority queue. Otherwise, the SU-EZ traffic will be considered high
priority traffic, affecting the preexisting traffic prioritization.
Promiscuous Authentication is not currently supported by SU-EZ units
Operator ESSID is not currently supported by SU-EZ units.
Hidden ESSID can not be employed when SU-EZ units are present in the cell.
Per SU Distance Learning is not currently supported by SU-EZ units.
SU-EZ units do not support AES OCB encryption.
The VLAN QinQ protocol is not currently supported by SU-EZ units. As a consequence, SU-EZ
units are not compatible with Service Provider VLAN link types.

Chapter 1 - System Description BreezeACCESS VL B&B (4.9 GHz only)
1.5 BreezeACCESS VL B&B (4.9 GHz only)
BreezeACCESS VL B&B is available in the 4.9 GHz band to support point-to-point

applications. A B&B point-to-point link includes:
AU-D-SA-4.9-6-VL: A standalone AU with a 25 dBi, 6° high gain directional

antenna.
SU-D-4.9-54-BD-VL: SU-54-BD with a 25 dBi, 6° high gain directional

antenna.

Chapter 1 - System Description Networking Equipment
1.6 Networking Equipment
The Base Station equipment is connected to the backbone through standard data
communication and telecommunication equipment. The 10/100BaseT ports of
the AU modules can be connected directly to a multi-port router or to an Ethernet
switch connected to a router.
The point-to-point link from the Base Station to the backbone can be either wired
or wireless. Data to the Internet is routed to the backbone through standard
routers.

Chapter 1 - System Description Management Systems
1.7 Management Systems
The end-to-end IP-based architecture of the system enables full management of

all components, from any point in the system. BreezeACCESS VL components can
be managed using standard management tools through SNMP agents that
implement standard and proprietary MIBs for remote setting of operational modes
and parameters. The same SNMP management tools can also be used to manage
other system components including switches, routers and transmission
equipment. Security features incorporated in BreezeACCESS VL units restrict
access for management purposes to specific IP addresses and/or directions, that
is, from the Ethernet and/or wireless link.
In addition, the Ethernet WAN can be used to connect to other Operation Support
Systems including servers, Customer Care systems and AAA (Authentication,
Authorization and Admission) tools.
1.7.1 AlvariCRAFT
AlvariCRAFT is an SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) application
designed for on-line management of system components. This utility simplifies the
installation and maintenance of small size installations by easily enabling the
change of settings or firmware upgrade for one unit or an entire sector at a time.
AlvariCRAFT allows accessing a wide array of monitoring and configuration

options, including:
Device Manager for the selected Unit
Selected unit or a complete sector configuration modification
Firmware upgrade for a single unit or an entire sector
On-line performance data monitoring
Export of configuration details to a CSV file
Support for Telnet cut-through to the managed devices and http cut-through
to Gateways or Wi2 APs behind connected SUs.

Chapter 1 - System Description Management Systems
1.7.2 AlvariSTAR
AlvariSTAR is a comprehensive Carrier-Class network management system for
Alvarion's Broadband Wireless Access products-based Networks. AlvariSTAR is
designed for today's most advanced Service Provider network Operation Centers
(NOCs), providing the network Operation, Administration and Maintenance
(OA&M) staff and managers with all the network surveillance, monitoring and
configuration capabilities that they require in order to effectively manage the BWA
network while keeping the resources and expenses at a minimum.
AlvariSTAR is designed to offer the network's OA&M staff with a unified, scalable
and distributable network management system. The AlvariSTAR system uses a
distributed client-server architecture, which provides the service provider with a
robust, scalable and fully redundant network management system in which all
single points of failure can be avoided.
AlvariSTAR provides the following BWA network management functionality:
Device Discovery
Device Inventory
Topology
Fault Management
Configuration Management
Data Collection
Performance Monitoring
Device embedded Software Upgrade
Security Management
Northbound interface to other Network Management Systems.
Embedded with the entire knowledge base of BWA network operations,

AlvariSTAR is a unique state-of-the-art power multiplier in the hands of the
service provider that enables the provisioning of satisfied customers. AlvariSTAR
dramatically extends the abilities of the service provider to provide a rich portfolio
of services and to support rapid customer base expansion.

Chapter 1 - System Description Specifications
1.8 Specifications
1.8.1 Radio
Table 1-7: Radio Specifications
Item Description
Frequency1 4.9 GHz Family: 4.900 - 5.100 GHz
5.2 GHz Family: 5.150 - 5.350 GHz
5.3 GHz Family: 5.250 - 5.350 GHz
5.4 GHz Family: 5.470 - 5.725 GHz
5.8 GHz Family: 5.725 - 5.875 GHz

Operation Mode Time Division Duplex (TDD)
Channel 20 MHz
Bandwidth1
10 MHz (HW Revision C and higher)
Central Frequency 10 MHz for HW Revision A and B
Resolution
5 MHz for HW Revision C and higher
Antenna Port AU-ODU, SU-E-ODU: N-Type jack, 50 ohm
SU-I: SMA jack, 50 ohm

Max. Input Power HW Revision A: -48 dBm typical
(at antenna port)
HW Revision B and higher: -30 dBm typical
Maximum Output All units: 21 dBm
Power2
SU-A-ODU Integral 21 dBi typical in the 5.150-5.875 GHz band, 20 dBi in the 4.9-5.1 GHz band. 10.5° AZ x
Antenna 10.5° EL, vertical polarization, compliant with ETSI EN 302 326-3 V1.2.1 (2007-01)
New SU-A-ODU 20 +/- 1 dBi typical in the 5.250-5.875 GHz band, 14° AZ x 14° EL, vertical/horizontal
Integral Antenna polarization, compliant with ETSI EN 302 326-3 V1.2.1 (2007-01), RoHS
(5.4/5.8 GHz)
SU-I-D Detached 15 dBi typical net (excluding cable loss) in the 5.150-5.875 GHz band, 45°~55° horizontal
Antenna x 10°~12° vertical, vertical polarization, RoHS compliant.

Table 1-7: Radio Specifications
Item Description
AU Antennas AU-Ant-5G-16-60: 16 dBi typical, 5.150-5.875 GHz, 60° AZ x 10° EL sector antenna,
(optional) vertical polarization, compliant with ETSI EN 302 326-3 V1.2.1 (2007-01)
AU-Ant-5G-17-90: 17 dBi typical, 5.150-5.875 GHz, 90° AZ x 6° EL sector antenna,

vertical polarization, compliant with ETSI EN 302 326-3 V1.2.1 (2007-01)
AU-Ant-5G-15-120: 15 dBi typical, 5.150-5.875 GHz, 120° AZ x 6° EL sector antenna,

vertical polarization, compliant with ETSI EN 302 326-3 V1.2.1 (2007-01)
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120: 15 dBi typical, 4.900-5.100 GHz, 124° AZ x 6.5° EL sector

antenna, vertical polarization, compliant with ETSI EN 302 326-3 V1.2.1 (2007-01)
AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni: 9 dB typical i, 4.900-5.100 GHz, 360° AZ x 8° EL, vertical

polarization
AU-Ant-5.4G-8-Omni: 8 dBi typical, 5.150-5.725 GHz, 360° AZ x 4.5° EL, vertical

polarization
AU-Ant-5.8G-8-Omni: 8 dBi typical, 5.725-5.875 GHz, 360° AZ x 9° EL, vertical

polarization
AU-Ant-5.8G-14-120-UK: 14dBi typical, 5.725-5.850 GHz, 120° AZ x 6.5° EL sector

antenna, vertical polarization. The antenna pattern complies with Ofcom's IR 2007
EIRP profiles
Ant-0.9G-V/H-10-90: 2x10dBi typical, 902-928 MHz, dual vertical/horizontal

polarization, 90° AZ x 16° EL for Vpol, 90° AZ x 19° EL for Hpol
AU-Ant-0.9G-7-Omni: 7dBi typical, 902-928 MHz, 360° AZ x 17° EL, vertical

polarization
Sensitivity, Modulation Level4 Sensitivity (HW Sensitivity (HW Minimum SNR

Minimum (dBm at Rev. A) Rev. B and higher)
antenna port,
1 -87 dBm -89 dBm 6 dB
PER<10%, 20
MHz bandwidth3) 2 -86 dBm -88 dBm 7 dB
3 -85 dBm -86 dBm 9 dB
4 -83 dBm -84 dBm 11 dB
5 -80 dBm -81 dBm 14 dB
6 -76 dBm -77 dBm 18 dB
7 -71 dBm -73 dBm 22 dB
85 -69 dBm -71 dBm 23 dB
Modulation OFDM modulation, 64 FFT points; BPSK, QPSK, QAM16, QAM64

1
The actual available frequency channels and bandwidth are defined by the selected Sub-Band, which
reflects the applicable regulatory constraints. For more details refer to section “Show Country
Dependent Parameters” on page 94).
2
The actual maximum available output power for each modulation level is defined by the selected
Sub-Band, which reflects the applicable regulatory constraints. For some countries the power may also be
limited by limitations on the maximum EIRP (also included in the Sub-Band parameters) and the
Antenna Gain parameter. For more details refer to section “Show Country Dependent Parame-
ters” on page 94 and to section “Transmit Power” on page 145. For information on specific HW
and Country Code limitations, see the Country Codes document.
3
The sensitivity values are for a bandwidth of 20 MHz. When using a 10 MHz bandwidth, the sensitivity for
each modulation level is 3 dB lower. For a 5 MHz bandwidth (900 MHz band) the sensitivity for each
modulation level is 6 dB lower.
4
Modulation Level indicates the radio transmission rate and the modulation scheme. Modulation Level 1 is
for the lowest radio rate and modulation scheme.
5
Modulation Level 8 is supported only in units with HW Revision B and above.
1.8.2 Data Communication
Table 1-8: Data Communication
Item Description
Standard compliance IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
VLAN Support Based on IEEE 802.1Q
Layer 2 Traffic Prioritization Based on IEEE 802.1p
Layer 3 Traffic Prioritization IP Precedence ToS (RFC791)
DSCP (RFC2474)
Layer 4 Traffic Prioritization UDP/TCP destination ports
1.8.3 Configuration and Management
Table 1-9: Configuration and Management
Item Description
Management Monitor program via Telnet
SNMP
Configuration upload/download
Management Access From Wired LAN, Wireless Link

Table 1-9: Configuration and Management
Item Description
Management access protection Multilevel password
Configuration of remote access direction (from Ethernet only,

from wireless link only or from both)
Configuration of IP addresses of authorized stations

Security Authentication messages encryption option
Data encryption option
WEP and AES OCB 128-bit encryption algorithms
FIPS 197 certified encryption (optional for Access Units with

HW revision C or higher (excluding AUS units), under license)
ESSID and Hidden ESSID

SNMP Agents SNMP ver 1 clientMIB II, Bridge MIB, Private BreezeACCESS VL
MIB
Allocation of IP parameters Configurable or automatic (DHCP client)
Software upgrade FTP
TFTP
Configuration upload/download FTP
TFTP
1.8.4 Standards Compliance, General
Table 1-10: Standards Compliance, General
Type Standard
EMC FCC Part 15 class B
ETSI EN 301 489-1

Safety UL60950-1
Environmental Operation ETS 300 019 part 2-3 class 3.2E for indoor
ETS 300 019 part 2-4 class 4.1E for outdoor

Storage ETS 300 019-2-1 class 1.2E
Transportation ETS 300 019-2-2 class 2.3

Table 1-10: Standards Compliance, General
Type Standard
Lightning protection (AU-ODU EN 61000-4-5, Class 3 (2kV)
Antenna connection)
Radio FCC Part 15.247
ETSI EN 300 328
ETSI EN 301 893
ETSI EN 302502
FCC part15.407
1.8.5 Physical and Electrical

1.8.5.1 SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
NOTE
In the 5.4 and 5.8 GHz band, the equipment may be shipped with a new, smaller size SU-A-ODU
that supports both horizontal and vertical polarization.
1.8.5.1.1 Mechanical
Table 1-11: Mechanical Specifications, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
Unit Structure Dimensions Weight

(cm) (kg)
General An IDU indoor unit and an ODU outdoor unit with an
integral antenna or a connection to an external antenna
IDU PS1073 Plastic box (black), desktop or wall mountable 14 x 6.6 x 3.5 0.3
SU-A-ODU Metal box plus an integral cut diamond shaped antenna 41.5 x 36.9 x 6.3 2.3
in a plastic enclosure, pole or wall mountable
New SU-A-ODU Diamond shaped metal box plus an integral antenna in 22 x 22 x 7 1.3
(5.4/5.8 GHz) a plastic enclosure, pole or wall mountable
SU-E-ODU Metal box, pole or wall mountable 30.5 x 11.7 x 5.7 1.8
New SU-E-ODU Diamond shaped metal box plus a plastic enclosure, 22 x 22 x 7 1.3
(0.9 GHz) pole or wall mountable
SU-Ant-0.9G-10 Pole mountable, elevation adjustable 30.5 x 30.5 x 2.5 1.3

1.8.5.1.2 Connectors
Table 1-12: Connectors, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
Unit Connector Description

IDU ETHERNET 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
Cable connection to a PC: crossed
Cable connection to a hub: straight
RADIO 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
AC IN 3 pin AC power plug
SU-A-ODU INDOOR 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof

sealing assembly
New SU-A-ODU (5.4/5.8 IDU COM 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a sealing cap
GHz)
SU-E-ODU INDOOR 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof

sealing assembly
ANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
1.8.5.1.3 Electrical
Table 1-13: Electrical Specifications, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
Unit Details
General Power consumption: 25W
IDU AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 50-60 Hz
ODU 54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable
1.8.5.2 SU-I Subscriber Unit

1.8.5.2.1 Mechanical and Electrical
Table 1-14: Mechanical and Electrical Specifications, SU-I Subscriber Unit
Item Details
Dimensions (cm) 11.8 (H) x 20 (L) x 3.1 (W)
Weight (g) 600
Power Consumption 15W maximum
DC Power Input (from Power Supply) 48 VDC
Mains Power Input (to Power Supply) 90-265 VAC, 47-63 Hz

Table 1-15: Connectors, SU-I Subscriber Unit
Connector Description
ETHERNET 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
Cable connection to a PC: straight
Cable connection to a hub: crossed
POWER (48 VDC) DC Power Plug
RF SMA jack
1.8.5.3 Modular Base Station Equipment

Table 1-16: Mechanical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment
Unit Structure Dimensions (cm) Weight (kg)

BS-SH 19" rack (3U) or desktop 13 x 48.2 x 25.6 4.76
BS-PS-DC DC power supply module 12.9 x 7.0 x 25.3 1.2
BS-PS-AC AC power supply module 12.9 x 7.0 x 25.3 1.2
BS-AU Indoor module of the AU-BS 12.9 x 3.5 x 25.5 0.15

access unit
AU-E-ODU pole or wall mountable 30.5 x 11.7 x 5.7 1.8
AU-Ant-5G-16-60 2"-3.5" pole mountable 43.6 x 25 x 1.0 2.2
AU-Ant-5G-17-90 2"-3.5" pole mountable 55 x 25 x 1.1 1.5
AU-Ant-5.4G-8-Omni 2.5"-4.5" pole mountable 70cm high, 6cm base 1.5

diameter
AU-Ant-5.8G-8-Omni Surface or pole mountable 40cm high, 3.2cm base 0.23

diameter
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120 2"-4" pole mountable 55 x 25 x 1.7 1.5
AU-Ant-5.8G-14-120-UK 1"-4" pole mountable 55 x 7.5 x 5 1
AU-Ant-0.9G-V/H-10-90 1.75"-4" pole mountable, up 122 x 34.3 x 20.3 15.4

to 15 o mechanical tilt
AU-Ant-0.9G-7-Omni Pole mountable 244 cm high, 3.3 cm base 1.8

diameter

Table 1-17: Connectors, Modular Base Station Equipment

BS-AU 10/100 BaseT 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs
RADIO 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs
AU-ODU INDOOR 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof

sealing assembly
BS-PS-AC AC-IN 3-PIN AC power plug
BS-PS-DC -48 VDC 3 pin DC D-Type 3 power pins plug
Amphenol 717TWA3W3PHP2V4RRM6
Antenna RF N-Type jack (on a 1.5m cable in the Omni-8-5.8)
Table 1-18: Electrical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment
Unit Details
General 240W max. for a fully equipped chassis (1 PS, 6 AU)
BS-PS-AC AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 47-65 Hz
DC power output: 54 V; 3.3 V
BS-PS-DC DC power input: -48 VDC nominal (-34 to -72), 10 A max
DC power output: 54 V; 3.3 V
BS-AU 3.3 VDC, 54 VDC from the power supply module(s) via the back
plane
AU-ODU 54 VDC from the BS-AU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable
AU-E-BS (IDU+ODU) Power consumption: 30W

1.8.5.4 Standalone Access Unit

Table 1-19: Mechanical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit
Unit Structure Dimensions (cm) Weight (kg)

General An IDU indoor unit and an
AU-ODU outdoor unit connected
to a detached antenna
IDU PS1073 Plastic box (black), desktop or 14 x 6.6 x 3.5 0.3

wall mountable
AU-E-ODU Pole or wall mountable 30.5 x 11.7 x 5.7 1.8
AU-Ant-5G-16-60 2"-3.5" pole mountable 43.6 x 25 x 1.0 2.2
AU-Ant-5.4G-8-Omni 2.5"-4.5" pole mountable 70 cm high, 6 cm 1.5

base diameter
AU-Ant-5.8G-8-Omni Surface or pole mountable 40 cm high, 3.2 cm 0.23

base diameter
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120 2"-4" pole mountable 55 x 25 x 1.7 1.5
AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni 1.5"-3" pole mountable 46 cm high, 5.5 cm 0.6

base diameter
AU-Ant-5.8G-14-120-UK 1"-4" pole mountable 55 x 7.5 x 5 1
AU-Ant-0.9G-V/H-10-90 1.75"-4" pole mountable, up to 15 122 x 34.3 x 20.3 15.4

o mechanical tilt
AU-Ant-0.9G-7-Omni Pole mountable 244 cm high, 3.3 cm 1.8

base diameter
Table 1-20: Connectors, Stand Alone Access Unit

IDU ETHERNET 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
RADIO 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
AC IN 3-PIN AC power plug

Table 1-20: Connectors, Stand Alone Access Unit

AU-ODU INDOOR 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a
waterproof sealing assembly
Antenna RF N-Type jack (on a 1.5m cable in the Omni-8-5.8)
Table 1-21: Electrical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit
Unit Details
General Power consumption: 25W
IDU AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 50-60 Hz
AU-ODU 54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable
1.8.5.5 25dBi Antenna (for B&B point-to-point link)
Table 1-22: 25dBi Antenna Specifications
Item Description
Regulatory Compliance ETSI EN 302 085 V1.1.2 (2001-02) Range1
Frequency Range 4.900-5.100 GHz
Gain 25dBi min.
Azimuth Beamwidth 6°
Elevation Beamwidth 6°
Polarization Linear (Vertical/Horizontal)
Dimensions (cm) 45 x 45 x 3
Weight (kg) 3 (max, excluding mounting kit)
Connector N-Type, Female
Mounting Kit 2.75"-3.5" pole, 0 to -10° tilt, 2.2kg
1.8.5.6 SU-I-D Wall/Window Detached Antenna
Table 1-23: SU-I-D Wall/Window Detached Antenna Specifications
Item Description
Frequency Range 5.150-5.875 GHz

Table 1-23: SU-I-D Wall/Window Detached Antenna Specifications
Item Description
Gain 15dBi net (excluding cable loss).
Azimuth Beamwidth 45°~55°
Elevation Beamwidth 10°~12°
Polarization Linear (Vertical)
Dimensions (cm) 33 x 9.3 x 2.1
Weight (g) 190
Connector SMA jack
Cable 2 meter, 2 x SMA plug, 3.6 dB max insertion loss
1.8.6 Environmental
Table 1-24: Environmental Specifications
Type Unit Details

Operating temperature Outdoor units -40° C to 55° C
Indoor equipment 0° C to 40° C
Operating humidity Outdoor units 5%-95% non condensing, weather protected
Indoor equipment 5%-95% non condensing

Chapter 2
Installation
Chapter 2 - Installation
In This Chapter:
“Installation Requirements” on page 31
“Equipment Positioning Guidelines” on page 36
“Installing the Outdoor Unit” on page 38
“Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit” on page 50
“Installing the SU-I” on page 52
“Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment” on page 62

Chapter 2 - Installation Installation Requirements
2.1 Installation Requirements
This section describes all the supplies required to install the BreezeACCESS VL
system components and the items included in each installation package.
NOTE
Installation requirements for SU-I are provided in section “Installing the SU-I” on page 52.
2.1.1 Packing List

2.1.1.1 SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
The SU-A/E installation kit includes the following components:
IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit
Mains power cord
Any of the following Outdoor Units:

SU-A-ODU A rectangular enclosure plus a diamond shaped vertically polarized
high-gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel (41.5 x 36.9 x 6.3 cm).
HW revision D or lower.
New SU-A-ODU A diamond shaped enclosure (22 x 22 x 7 cm) with a vertically/horizontally

polarized high-gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel.
The smaller size new SU-A-ODU (HW revision E) is currently available only
in the 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz bands.
SU-E-ODU A rectangular enclosure (30.5 x 11.7 x 5.7 cm) with a connection to an

external antenna (antenna and cable not included). HW revision D or lower.
New SU-E-ODU A diamond shaped enclosure (22 x 22 x 7 cm) with a connection to an

external antenna (antenna and cable not included).
NOTE
The SU-A-ODU and SU-E-ODU are supplied without the waterproof sealing assembly for the
INDOOR connector. The sealing assembly is supplied with the IDU to ODU cable kit.

Pole mounting kit for the ODU (the kit for the new, smaller-size ODU is
different from the kit for all other ODUs)
An IDU to ODU cable kit, including 20m Category 5E Ethernet cable with a
shielded RJ-45 connector crimped on one end, a waterproof sealing assembly
and two shielded RJ-45 connectors (not applicable for the new smaller size
SU-A-ODU and SU-E-ODU)
2.1.1.2 Modular Base Station Equipment

This section describes the items included in the installation packages for each
Modular Base Station system component.
2.1.1.2.1 BS-SH Base Station Chassis

The BS-SH installation kit includes the following components:
BS-SH chassis with blank panels
Rubber legs for optional desktop installation
2.1.1.2.2 AU-E-BS Access Unit

The AU-E-BS and installation kit includes the following components:
BS-AU Network Interface module
AU-ODU outdoor unit:

AU-E-ODU A rectangular enclosure (30.5 x 11.7 x 5.7 cm) with a connection to an
external antenna (antenna and cable not included). HW revision D or
lower.
Pole mounting kit for the AU-ODU (the kit for the new, smaller-size ODU is
2.1.1.2.3 BS-PS-AC Power Supply

Up to two BS-PS-AC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station
chassis. The BS-PS-AC installation kit includes the following components:
BS-PS-AC power supply module

Mains power cord
2.1.1.2.4 BS-PS-DC Power Supply

Up to two BS-PS-DC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station
chassis. The BS-PS-DC installation kit includes the following components:
BS-PS-DC power supply module
DC power cable
2.1.1.3 AU-E-SA Standalone Access Unit

The AU-E-SA installation kit includes the following components:
IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit
Mains power cord
AU-ODU outdoor unit:

AU-E-ODU A rectangular enclosure (30.5 x 11.7 x 5.7 cm) with a connection to an
external antenna (antenna and cable not included). HW revision D or
lower.
Pole mounting kit for the AU-ODU (the kit for the new, smaller-size ODU is
2.1.1.4 Optional Items Available from Alvarion
IDU to ODU Category 5 Ethernet cable kit with a shielded RJ-45 connector
crimped on one end and two shielded RJ-45 connectors (available in different
lengths. For more details refer to section “Indoor-to-Outdoor Cables” on
page 34).
Antenna (for SU/AU-E-ODUs) and RF cable.
Tilt Pole Mounting kit for the new, smaller size ODU.

A Y-cable for connecting directly to the IDU COM of ODUs with a new (smaller
size) enclosure for configuration/performance monitoring using a portable PC.
2.1.1.5 Additional Installation Requirements

The following items are also required to install the BreezeACCESS VL system
components:
Ethernet cable (straight for connecting to a hub/switch etc., crossed for

connecting directly to a PC's NIC)
Crimping tool for RJ-45 connectors
Ground cables with an appropriate termination
Mains plug adapter or termination plug (if the power plug on the supplied AC
power cord does not fit local power outlets)
Portable PC with Ethernet card and Telnet software or AlvariCRAFT for

BreezeACCESS VL application and a crossed Ethernet cable
Installation tools and materials, including appropriate means (e.g. a pole) for
installing the outdoor unit.
2.1.2 Indoor-to-Outdoor Cables
NOTE
The length of the indoor-to-outdoor Ethernet cable should not exceed 90 meters. The length of the
Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's equipment, together with the length of the
Indoor-to-Outdoor cable, should not exceed 100 meters.
Use only Category 5E Ethernet cables from approved manufacturers, listed in

Table 2-4. Consult with Alvarion specialists on the suitability of other cables.
Table 2-4: Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables
Manufacturer Part Number

Synergy Cables Ltd. 612098
www.synergy-cables.com
HES Cabling Systems H5E-00481

www.hescs.com

Table 2-4: Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables
Manufacturer Part Number

Teldor 8393204101
www.teldor.com
Southbay Holdings Limited TSM2404A0D

11th Fl., 15, Lane 347, Jong Jeng Rd.
Shin Juang City, Taipei County
Taiwan, R.O.C
Attn: Eva Lin
Tel. 886-2-2832 3339
Fax. 886-2-2206 0081
E-mail: [email protected]
NOTE
In case of missing information (product specifications, ordering information, etc.) regarding these
products on the manufacturer's web site, it is highly recommended to contact the manufacturer's
sales representative directly.

Chapter 2 - Installation Equipment Positioning Guidelines
2.2 Equipment Positioning Guidelines
This section provides key guidelines for selecting the optimal installation locations
for the various BreezeACCESS VL system components.
CAUTION
ONLY experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes
and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities should
install outdoor units and antennas.
Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS VL product warranty and may expose the end user or
Service Provider to legal and financial liabilities. Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not
liable for injury, damage or regulation violations associated with the installation of Outdoor Units or
antennas.
Select the optimal locations for the equipment using the following guidelines:
The outdoor unit can be either pole or wall mounted. Its location should
enable easy access to the unit for installation and testing.
The higher the placement of the antenna, the better the achievable link
quality.
ODU units without an integral antenna should be installed as close as

possible to the antenna (to ensure that the antenna's characteristics are not
affected by the ODU the distance must be higher than 10 cm).
The antenna connected to the AU-ODU unit, should be installed so as to

provide coverage to all Subscriber Units (SUs) within its service area.
NOTE
The recommended minimum distance between any two antennas serving adjacent sectors is 2
meters. The recommended minimum distance between two antennas serving opposite cells
(installed back-to-back) is 5 meters.
The antenna of the SU (integrated or external) should be installed to provide a

direct, or near line of sight with the Base Station antenna. The antenna should
be aligned to face the Base Station.
In some cases it might be necessary to up/down-tilt the antenna. An optional

Tilt accessory for the ODU providing a tilt range of +/-15° is available from
Alvarion. The tilt option might be necessary to either improve the link
conditions or, if the SU is too close to the Base Station, to reduce the receive

Chapter 2 - Installation Equipment Positioning Guidelines
signals strength. As a rule of thumb, if the SU is located at a distance of less

than 300 meters from the Base Station, it is recommended to up-tilt the
antenna by approximately 10° to 15° (especially in line-of-sight conditions) to
avoid saturation of the receivers by too strong signals.
The indoor equipment should be installed as close as possible to the location

where the indoor-to-outdoor cable enters the building. The location of the
indoor equipment should take into account its connection to a power outlet
and the customer's equipment.

Chapter 2 - Installation Installing the Outdoor Unit
2.3 Installing the Outdoor Unit
The following sections describe how to install the outdoor units, including pole
mounting the ODU, and connecting the indoor-to-outdoor, grounding and RF
cables.
NOTE
Ensure that outdoor units, antennas and supporting structures are properly installed to eliminate
any physical hazard to either people or property. Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit,
antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and
safety codes. Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and
national codes, it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna pole
(when using external antenna) are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so
as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges. In any event, Alvarion is not
liable for any injury, damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation,
grounding or lightning protection.
2.3.1 Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit
NOTE
This section is not applicable for the new, smaller size ODU. For details on pole mounting the new
ODU refer to section 2.3.2.
The Outdoor Unit can be mounted on a pole using one of the following options:
Special clamps and threaded rods are supplied with each unit. There are two
pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit, enabling to use the special
clamps for mounting the unit on diverse pole diameters.
Special grooves on the sides of the unit enable the use of metal bands to
secure the unit to a pole. The bands must be 9/16 inches wide and at least 12
inches long. The metal bands are not included with the installation package.
NOTE
Be sure to mount the unit with the bottom panel, which includes the LED indicators, facing
downward.

Figure 2-1: Threaded Holes/Grooves
Figure 2-2 illustrates the method of mounting an outdoor unit on a pole, using
the clamps and threaded rods.
Figure 2-2: 3" Pole Installation Using Special Clamps

NOTE
There is a groove on one end of the threaded rod. Be sure to insert the threaded rods with the
grooves pointing outward, as these grooves enable you to use a screwdriver to fasten the rods to
the unit.
2.3.2 Pole Mounting the New ODU

The new ODU can be mounted on a 1" to 4" pole using one of the following
options:
A pole mounting kit is supplied with each unit. The kit includes a special
clamp and a pair of threaded rods, flat washers, spring washers and nuts.
There are two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit, enabling to use
the mounting kit for installing the unit using either vertical or horizontal
polarization. The clamp enables installing the unit on diverse pole diameters
from 1" to 4".
A Tilt Pole Mounting kit, providing a tilt range of +/-15° is available from
Alvarion. The Tilt kit can be attached to the ODU and be mounted on a 1" to 4"
pole using two 9/16" wide metal bands.
The following sections describe the installation of the SU-A-ODU. Installation of

the SU-E-ODU is similar, with the exception that it does not include an integral
antenna and the polarization issue is not relevant.
2.3.2.1 Polarization
The new SU-A-ODU can be pole mounted to provide either vertical or horizontal
polarization.

Polarization
arrow
Grounding
screw
Figure 2-3: Back View of the new SU-A-ODU
The Polarization Arrow on the back of the unit indicates the type of polarization.
For vertical polarization install the unit with the Polarization Arrow pointing
upward (as in the figure above).
For horizontal polarization install the unit with the Polarization Arrow pointing
sideward and the connectors facing downward.
2.3.2.2 Pole Mounting the ODU Using the Clamp

Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 illustrate how to mount an ODU on a pole, using the
clamp and threaded rods.
NOTE
There is a groove on one end of the threaded rod. Be sure to insert the threaded rods with the
grooves pointing outward, and fasten them to the unit using a screwdriver. Install the unit with the
bottom panel, which includes the connectors, facing downward.

Figure 2-4: New SU-A-ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp, Vertical Polarization

Figure 2-5: New SU-A-ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp, Horizontal Polarization

2.3.2.3 Pole Mounting the ODU with the Tilt Accessory
Figure 2-6: New ODU Pole Installation Using the Tilt Accessory, Vertical Polarization
To mount the ODU on a pole using the Tilt accessory:
1 Attach the Tilt accessory to the ODU using the two pairs of flat washers, spring
washers and nuts supplied in the Tilt kit.
2 Mount the Tilt accessory on a 1" to 4" pole using two 9/16" metal bands.
3 Release slightly the Tilt Control Screw, tilt the ODU downward/upward as
required, and re-tighten the screw.
2.3.3 Protecting ODU Connections

Use appropriate sealing material to protect the connection against moisture and
humidity. Use removable sealing material, such as a tar seal, to enable future
access to the connector.

NOTE
Use high quality sealing material such as Scotch® 130C Linerless Rubber Splicing Tape from 3M to
ensure IP-67 compliant protection against dust and water.
Loop and tie the cable near the unit for strain relief and for routing water away
from the unit: use additional cable strips to route the cable such that water can
accumulate on the cable bends, away from the unit.
2.3.4 Connecting the Grounding and Antenna

Cables
The Grounding screw (marked ) is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor
unit (in the new ODU it is located on the backside of the unit). The Antenna RF
connector (marked ) is located on the top panel of the AU-E-ODU/SU-E-ODU.
To connect the grounding cable:
1 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding terminal and tighten
the grounding screw firmly.
2 Connect the other end of the grounding cable to a good ground (earth)
connection
.
To connect the RF cable (units with external antenna):
1 Connect one end of the coaxial RF cable to the RF connector on the unit.
2 Connect the other end of the RF cable to the antenna.
3 The RF connectors should be properly sealed to protect against rain and

moisture.

Figure 2-7: Bottom Panel of the ODU

(all ODUs except to new ODU, shown without the sealing assembly)
Figure 2-8: Bottom Panel of the New SU-A-ODU (without IDU COM Sealing Cap)
Figure 2-9: Bottom Panel of the New 0.9 GHz ODU (without the IDU COM Sealing Cap)

NOTE
The MAC Address of the unit is marked on both the ODU and the indoor unit (on the print side of the
BS-AU module or on the bottom side of the Universal IDU). If for any reason the ODU is not used
with the IDU with which it was shipped, the MAC Address of the system is in accordance with the
marking on the ODU.
2.3.5 Connecting the Indoor-to-Outdoor Cable

2.3.5.1 Units with an Installed Waterproof Seal (not applicable to
new ODU)
To connect the indoor-to-outdoor cable:
1 Remove the two screws holding the waterproof seal to the outdoor unit and
remove the waterproof seal.
2 Unscrew the top nut from the waterproof seal.
Figure 2-10: The Waterproof Seal
3 Route a straight Category 5E Ethernet cable (8-wire, 24 AWG) through both

the top nut and the waterproof seal.

NOTE
Use only Category 5E 4x2x24# FTP outdoor cables from an approved manufacturer. See list of
approved cables and length limitations in section “Indoor-to-Outdoor Cables” on page 34.
4 Insert and crimp the RJ-45 connector. Refer to Appendix D for instructions on
preparing the cable.
5 Connect the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit RJ-45 connector.
6 Replace the waterproof seal and then the top nut. Make sure that the external
jack of the cable is well inside the waterproof seal to guarantee a good seal.
7 Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment.
8 Assemble an RJ-45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the
indoor-to-outdoor cable.
2.3.5.2 Units with a Waterproof Seal Supplied with the Ethernet

Cable (not applicable to new ODU)
To connect the indoor-to-outdoor cable:
1 Verify that the o-ring supplied with the cable kit is in place.
2 Connect the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit.
3 Attach the waterproof seal to the unit. Tighten the top nut.
5 Assemble an RJ-45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the
indoor-to-outdoor cable.
See Appendix D for instructions on preparing the cable.
2.3.5.3 New ODU

1 The sealing cap has a special groove allowing to insert an ethernet cable with
an already assembled RJ-45 connector through the cap. To expose the groove,
lightly squeeze the cap. Carefully insert the cable with the assembled
connector through the groove.

Figure 2-11: Inserting the IDU COM Cable into the Sealing Cap
2 Connect the Ethernet cable to the IDU COM RJ-45 connector.
3 Put the sealing cap back in its place. Make sure that the small protrusion on
the side of the cap fits inside the hole on the connector's protective body.
Figure 2-12: Connecting the IDU COM connector and inserting the Sealing Cap
5 Assemble a shielded RJ-45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end
of the IDU-ODU cable. See Appendix D for instructions on preparing the cable.

Chapter 2 - Installation Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit
2.4 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit
The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf. Alternatively, it may be

wall-mounted using the kit supplied with the unit.
Figure 2-13: IDU PS 1073 Front Panel
The RADIO connector and RESET button are located on the front panel, the
ETHERNET connector is located on the side panel and LEDs are located on the
top panel.
CAUTION
Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port. The RADIO port supplies DC power to the
ODU, and this may harm other equipment connected to it.
To install the IDU:
1 Connect the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable to the RADIO connector, located on the

front panel of the indoor unit.
2 Connect the power cord to the unit's AC socket, located on the rear panel.
Connect the other end of the power cord to the AC mains. The unit can operate
with AC mains of 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz.
NOTE
The color codes of the power cable are as follows:

Brown Phase ~
Blue Neutral 0
Yellow/Green Ground
3 Verify that the POWER LED is lit, indicating that power is supplied to the unit.

Chapter 2 - Installation Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit
4 Configure the basic parameters as described in “Configuring Basic

Parameters” on page 70.
5 Connect the 10/100 BaseT ETHERNET connector to the network. The cable
connection should be a straight Ethernet if connecting the indoor unit to a
hub/switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC Network
Interface Card (NIC).
NOTE
The length of the Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's equipment, together with
the length of the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable, should not exceed 100 meters.
2.4.1 RESET Button Functionality

Using a sharp object, press the recessed RESET button for a short time to reset
the unit and reboot from the Main version.
In units with ODU HW revision C and higher, the RESET button can be used for
setting the unit to its factory defaults. Press the button for at least 5 seconds
(until the ETH LED of the IDU stops blinking): the unit will reboot with the factory
default configuration.

Chapter 2 - Installation Installing the SU-I
2.5 Installing the SU-I
The following sections describe how to install the SU-I CPE.
2.5.1 Installation Requirements

2.5.1.1 Packing List
SU-I CPE
Power Adapter
3 meters Ethernet Cable
Wall/window mountable detached antenna kit, including wall/window

mounting accessories and a 2 meters SMA-SMA (M/M) RF cable (only with
SU-I-D).
2.5.1.2 Additional/Optional Items
Mains plug adapter or termination plug (if the power plug on the power
adapter not fit local power outlets. The Power Adapter is supplied with a North
American power plug and an EU power connector adapter).
Portable PC with an Ethernet card and a straight Ethernet cable for

configuring parameters using either Telnet or AlvariCRAFT for BreezeACCESS
VL application. TFTP server SW is required for downloading SW versions.
Other installation tools and materials (means for securing cables to walls,
etc.).
NOTE
Items marked with an asterisk (*) are available from Alvarion.

2.5.2 SU-I Connectors and LEDs
Figure 2-14: SU-I Panel
Table 2-5: SU-I Panel Components
Name Description Functionality

Status Self-test and power Green: Power is available and self-test passed.
indication
Blinking Amber: Testing (not ready for operation).
Red: Self-test failed. Fatal error.
Ethernet Ethernet activity/ connectivity Green: Ethernet link between the SU-I and the data
indication equipment is detected, no activity.
Blinking Green: Ethernet connectivity is OK, with traffic

on the port. Blinking rate proportional to traffic rate.
Red: No Ethernet connectivity between the SU-I and the

data equipment.

Table 2-5: SU-I Panel Components

W-Link Wireless Link traffic Green: Unit is associated with an AU, no wireless link
Indication activity.
Blinking Green: Data received or transmitted on the

wireless link. Blinking rate is proportional to traffic rate.
Off: Wireless link disabled.
SNR bar Received signal strength Red LED: Signal is too low (SNR < 4dB).
Indication
8 green LEDs: Quality of the received signal.
Orange LED: Signal is too high (SNR > 50dB).
ETH RJ-45 Connector Connection to the user's LAN/PC:
Cable connection to a hub/switch/router: Crossed
Cable connection to a PC: Straight

RF SMA Jack Connection to detached antenna
48V DC DC Power Jack Connection to Power Adapter
* After power-up, the SIGNAL LEDs illuminates for a few seconds until self-test is finished.
2.5.3 Installation Guidelines

The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf. Instructions for the available
installation options of the detached antenna (included in the SU-I-D package) are
provided in the antenna package and in “Installing the Detached Antenna” on
page 55.
It is recommended to install the antenna on a window or on a wall according to

specific conditions of the location. The antenna should be facing the direction of
the Base Station. Use only the RF cable supplied with the antenna (if needed, use
a longer Ethernet cable).
Avoid metal obstacles such as metal window frames or metal film anti-glare
windows in the transmission path.
Position the antenna away from electrical equipment, including the data
equipment, monitor etc., metal furniture, and moving metal objects such as metal
fans or doors.

2.5.4 Installing the SU-I

2.5.4.1 Connecting the SU-I
To install the SU-I:
1 Connect the Power Adapter DC cable to the POWER jack. Connect the Power
Adapter to the AC mains.
2 Verify that the green Status LED located on the unit's front panel illuminates,
indicating that the power supply to the unit is OK and self test passed
successfully.
3 Connect the RF cable supplied with the antenna to the SMA jack located on
the unit's front panel. Install the antenna using the instructions provided in
Section “Installing the Detached Antenna” on page 55 on page 57, and connect
to it the other end of the RF cable. Do not over-tighten the SMA connectors.
4 If parameters are not pre-configured, configure the basic parameters as

described in Section “Configuring Basic Parameters” on page 70.
5 Align the antenna as described in Section “Aligning the Subscriber Unit

Antenna” on page 76.
6 Connect the 10/100 Base-T Ethernet connector to the data equipment. The
cable connection should be a crossed Ethernet if connecting to a hub/switch
and a straight cable if connecting directly to a PC Network Interface Card
(NIC).
7 Verify proper operation of the Ethernet link (see Table 2-5 for the Ethernet
activity LED indication). To verify data connectivity from the end-user's PC or
from a portable PC connected to the unit, ping a known device in the network,
or try connecting to the Internet.
2.5.5 Installing the Detached Antenna

The detached antenna kit includes the following components:
ALA04-200160 panel antenna
2 meter SMA-SMA (M/M) RF cable

Simple wall mounting kit, enabling installation on a wall (without any

capability for adjusting the direction). For installation instructions see “Wall
Mount” on page 56.
Wall mounting kit with rotation capability, enabling installation on a wall with
capability for adjusting the direction. For installation instructions see “Wall
Mount with Rotation Capability” on page 57.
Simple window mounting accessories, enabling installation on a glass window

(without any capability for adjusting the direction). For installation
instructions see“Window Mount” on page 59.
Window mounting kit with rotation capability, enabling installation on a glass

window (with rotation capability for adjusting the direction). For installation
instructions see “Window Mount with Rotation Capability” on page 60.
NOTE
Ensure that the antenna is mounted vertical to the floor, with the connector facing downward, and
the front of the antenna facing to the exterior of the building, preferably directed towards the Base
Station.
CAUTION
In order to avoid damage from lightning strikes, the antenna must be placed below roof level.
2.5.5.1 Wall Mount

The installation kit includes 2 plastic anchors and 2 #8 screws.
1 If anchors are needed (wall-board, plaster board, etc.), drill two holes for the
anchors using a 5 mm drill bit and insert anchors. Use a 9/64" drill bit for
screwing directly into a solid surface (stud).
2 Fasten the antenna to the wall. Refer to Figure 2-15 for directions. Use the
two #8 screws provided with the kit. Do not over tighten.
3 Connect the antenna cable to the connector located on the bottom side of the
antenna. Hand tighten, do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool. Do
not over tighten.

Figure 2-15: Wall Mounting the Antenna
2.5.5.2 Wall Mount with Rotation Capability

The installation kit includes 4 L-type mounting plates (one top, one bottom, one
Wall-V and one Wall-H), 6 M5 screws (with washers and spring washers), 2 plastic
anchors and 2 #8 screws.
1 If anchors are needed (wall-board, plaster board, etc.), drill two holes (361 mm
apart) for the anchors using a 5 mm drill bit and insert anchors. Use a 9/64"
drill bit for screwing directly into a solid surface (stud).
2 Assemble the top L-type plate with the Wall-V L-type plate. Note, the Wall-V
plate is the one with the vertical ellipse on the short side. Make sure the
inscriptions are facing upwards. Use two M5 screws to fasten the plates
together. Do not over tighten. See Figure 2-16.

3 Assemble the bottom L-type plate with the Wall-H L-type plate. Note, the
Wall-H plate is the one with the horizontal ellipse on the short side. Make sure
the inscriptions are facing upwards. Use two M5 screws to fasten the plates
together. Do not over tighten.
4 Attach the assembled plates to the flat rear-side of the antenna. Use the two
remaining M5 screws to fasten them.
5 Fasten the antenna to the wall. Use the two #8 screws provided with the kit.
Do not over tighten.
antenna. Use only the torque key supplied with the antenna. Do not over
tighten. Do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool.
7 Rotate the antenna left or right so the domed surface of the antenna is facing
the direction of the Base Station. Check the received Signal LEDs to ensure
the antenna is aimed correctly.

Figure 2-16: Wall Mount with Rotation Capability
2.5.5.3 Window Mount

The installation kit includes 2 suction cups.
1 Attach the suction cups to the antenna. Refer to Figure 2-17 for directions.
2 Determine the location of the antenna on the glass. Attach it to the window by
pressing the suction cups onto the glass.

CAUTION
The suction cups are sensitive to weather conditions and may not hold in high temperatures or
during rain. It is strongly recommended to mount the antenna on the wall using the supplied
brackets.
Figure 2-17: Window Mounting the Antenna
2.5.5.4 Window Mount with Rotation Capability

The installation kit includes the following: 4 PHK40*16PT screws (1), 2 M4
washers (2), 2 rotation bars (3) and 2 suction cups (4).
1 Attach the rotation bars to the antenna and the suction cups to the rotation
bars. Refer to Figure 2-18 for directions.

2 Determine the location of the antenna on the glass. Attach it to the window by
pressing the suction cups onto the glass.
4 Rotate the antenna left or right so the domed surface of the antenna is facing
the direction of the Base Station. Check the received Signal LEDs to ensure
the antenna is aimed correctly.
CAUTION
The suction cups are sensitive to weather conditions and may not hold in high temperatures or
during rain. It is strongly recommended to mount the antenna on the wall using the supplied
brackets.
Figure 2-18: Window Mounting with Rotation Capability

Chapter 2 - Installation Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
2.6 Installing the Modular Base Station

Equipment
The following sections describe the slot assignment for the Base Station chassis,
provide illustrated descriptions of the power supply modules and Access Unit
network interface modules, and describe how to install the Base Station
equipment.
2.6.1 BS-SH Slot Assignment

The Base Station chassis comprises ten slots, as shown in Figure 2-19.
Figure 2-19: BS-SH Chassis Slot Assignment
To enable power supply redundancy, two BS-PS power supply modules can be
installed in the wider side slots. If a single power supply module is used, it can be
inserted into either one of the two available slots.
The remaining eight slots can hold up to six BS-AU modules. Unused slots should
remain covered until required.
The design of the BS-SH supports collocation of BreezeACCESS VL Access Units

with Access Units belonging to other BreezeACCESS families using GFSK
modulation. It supports any mixture of BS-AU modules with BreezeACCESS
GFSK BS-AU modules, including an optional BS-GU-GPS module. If Access Units
belonging to other BreezeACCESS families are used, then it is necessary to use
two power supply modules: one BS-PS (AC or DC) power supply for the

BreezeACCESS VL Access Units and one BS-PS GFSK (AC or DC) for the
BreezeACCESS GFSK Access Units.
2.6.2 BS-PS-AC Power Supply Module

The BS-PS-AC is an AC to DC converter that provides power to all the BS-AU
modules installed in the BS-SH chassis. Figure 2-20 shows the BS-PS-AC front
panel.
Figure 2-20: BS-PS-AC Front Panel
The BS-PS-AC includes a power input connector, marked AC IN, for connecting
the AC power cord to the mains.
The ON/OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains power to the power supply
module.
Table 2-6: BS-PS LED Functionality
Name Description
54V Green LED. Indicates that the 54V power supply module is OK.

Table 2-6: BS-PS LED Functionality
Name Description
3.3V Green LED. Indicates that the 3.3V power supply module is OK.
OVER TEMP Red LED. Indicates an over temperature condition in the power
supply module.
2.6.3 BS-PS-DC Power Supply Module

The BS-PS-DC is a DC-to-DC converter that provides power to all the BS-AU
modules installed in the BS-SH chassis. Figure 2-21 shows the BS-PS-DC front
panel.
Figure 2-21: BS-PS-DC Front Panel
The BS-PS-DC provides a power input connector, marked -48 VDC, for connecting
the -48 VDC power source to the module.
The color codes of the cable wires are as follows:
Black (pin 2): 48 VDC

White (pin 1): + (Return)
Shield (pin 3)
The ON/OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains power to the power supply
module.
The functionality of the LEDs is described in Table 2-6.
2.6.4 BS-AU Network Interface Module

Figure 2-22 shows the front panel of the BS-AU Access Unit Network Interface
module.
Figure 2-22: BS-AU Front Panel
The BS-AU provides the following interfaces:
10/100 BaseT: A 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS-AU

to the network. A straight Ethernet cable should be used to connect the
module to a hub, router or switch.

RADIO: A 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS-AU to an

AU-ODU outdoor unit.
CAUTION
Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port. The RADIO port supplies DC power to the
ODU, and this may harm other equipment connected to it.
The recessed RESET switch on the front panel is for resetting the outdoor unit.
2.6.5 Installing the BS-SH Chassis and Modules

This section describes how to install the power supply and Access Unit network
interface modules in the Base Station chassis.
To install the BS SH chassis and modules:
1 Install the BS-SH chassis in a 19" cabinet. To prevent over-heating, leave a

free space of at least 1U between the upper/lower covers of the BS-SH chassis
and other units in the cabinet.
OR
Place the BS-SH chassis on an appropriate shelf or table. When mounting the
BS-SH on a shelf or table, attach the rubber legs supplied with the unit.
2 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the ground terminal located on the
rear panel of the BS-SH chassis and firmly tighten the grounding screw.
3 Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground connection or to

the cabinet, if applicable.
4 Carefully insert the BS-PS power supply and the BS-AU modules into the
relevant slots and push firmly until they are securely locked. Before insertion,
verify that the switches of all BS-PS modules are in the OFF position. Refer to
section “BS-SH Slot Assignment” on page 62 for a description of the slot
assignment.
5 Close the captive screws attached to each module.
6 Place blank covers over all of the unused slots.
7 Connect the indoor-to outdoor cable(s) to the RADIO connector(s) of the BS-AU
module(s).

8 If a BS-PS-DC power supply is used, connect the DC power cord to the -48
VDC IN jack of the BS-PS-DC power supply. If a redundant power supply
module is installed, connect a DC power cord also to the second DC power
module. Connect the power cord(s) to the -48 VDC power source, as follows:
a Connect the black wire to the 48 VDC contact of the power source.
b Connect the white wire to the + (Return) contact.
c Connect the shield to the ground.
9 If a BS-PS-AC power supply is used, connect the AC power cord to the AC IN

jack of the BS-PS-AC power supply. If a redundant power supply module is
installed, connect an AC power cord also to the second AC power module.
Connect the power cord(s) to the mains outlet.
10 Switch the BS-PS-AC/DC power supplies to ON. Verify that all power indicator
LEDs on the BS-PS-AC/DC front panel are ON and that the OVERTEMP alarm
indicator is off. Refer to Table 2-6 for a description of these LEDs.
11 Configure the basic parameters in all BS-AU modules as described

“Configuring Basic Parameters” on page 70.
12 Connect the 10/100 BaseT LAN connector(s) to the network. The cable
connection should be straight Ethernet if connecting the indoor unit to a
hub/switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC Network
Interface Card (NIC).
NOTE
The length of each of the Ethernet cables (the cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's
equipment and the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable) should not exceed 100 meters.
Reset the unit using the RESET button after connecting or reconnecting the indoor and outdoor
units with the indoor-to-outdoor cable.

Chapter 3
Commissioning
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
In This Chapter:
“Configuring Basic Parameters” on page 70
“Using the Optional Y-cable (New SU A/E ODU)” on page 75
“Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna” on page 76
“Configuring the Subscriber Unit's Maximum Modulation Level” on page 78
“Operation Verification” on page 80

Chapter 3 - Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters
3.1 Configuring Basic Parameters
3.1.1 Initial Configuration

After completing the installation process, as described in the preceding chapter,
the basic parameters must be configured to ensure that the unit operates
correctly. After the basic parameters have been configured, additional parameters
can be remotely configured via the Ethernet port or the wireless link using Telnet
or SNMP management, or by loading a configuration file.
Refer to section “Working with the Monitor Program” on page 87 for information
on how to access the Monitor program using Telnet and how to use it.
The Basic Configuration menu includes all the parameters necessary for the
initial installation and operation of Subscriber and Access Units. In many
installations, most of these parameters should not be changed from their default
values. The basic parameters and their default values are listed in Table 3-1.
Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the applicable parameters.
Table 3-1: Basic Parameters
Parameter Default Value Comment

Ethernet Port Negotiation Auto Negotiation
Mode (in Unit Control
Parameters)
IP Address 10.0.0.1
Subnet Mask 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway Address 0.0.0.0
DHCP Options Disable
Access to DHCP AU: From Ethernet Only
SU: From Wireless Only
ESSID ESSID1
Hidden ESSID Option (AU) Disable
Hidden ESSID Support (SU) Disable
Operator ESSID Option (AU) Enable
Operator ESSID (AU) ESSID1 Applicable only if Operator ESSID Option is

set to Enable.


Country Code Select Depends on factory Applicable only for 5.4 and 5.8 GHz units.
configuration See “Country Code Selection” on
page 72 below.
Sub-Band Select (AU) 1 Applicable only if more than one Sub-Band is
available
Frequency (AU) The lowest frequency in

the selected Sub-Band
User Defined Frequency All frequencies

Subsets (SU)
DFS Required By Regulation Depends on Country

(AU, if DFS is supported by Code
Country Code)
Frequency Subset Definition All frequencies Applicable only if DFS is enabled

(AU, if DFS is supported)
DFS Detection Algorithm (AU ETSI Applicable only if DFS is enabled

using Universal Country Code
in 5.4 or 5.8 GHz band)
Transmit Power Dependent on HW Transmit Power in SU cannot be higher than

revision, unit type and the Maximum Tx Power parameter.
Sub-Band
Maximum Tx Power (SU) Dependent on HW Maximum Tx Power cannot be higher than

revision and Sub-Band the upper limit according to the Sub-Band in
use.
Tx Power (AU) On
Antenna Gain (units with According to the If set to "Not Set Yet", must be configured
external antenna) antenna supplied with according to actual value, taking into account
the unit and the cable's attenuation.
Sub-Band.
ATPC Option Enable
ATPC Option for EZ Disable
Best AU Support (SU) Disable
Preferred AU MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00 Applicable only when Best AU Support is

(SU) (none) enabled.
Cell Distance Mode (AU) Automatic
Maximum Cell Distance (AU) 0 (No Compensation)
Per SU Distance Learning (AU) Disable


Maximum Modulation Level 8 (or the highest value Refer to section “Configuring the
(SU) supported according to Subscriber Unit's Maximum
the country code). Not Modulation Level” on page 78.
higher than 7 for units
with HW revision A.
Wi2 IP Address (SU) 0.0.0.0 (none)
VLAN ID-Management 65535
Authentication Algorithm Open System Availability of security parameters depends

on support according to the country code.
Data Encryption Option Disable
Security Mode WEP
Default Multicast Key (AU) Key 1
Default Key (SU) Key 1
Key 1 to Key 4 00……0 (32 zeros,

meaning no key)
NOTE
Some parameters are changed to their new values only after reset (refer to Appendix E for more
details). After completing the necessary configuration changes, the unit must be reset in order to
activate the new configuration.
3.1.2 Country Code Selection
CAUTION
The selected Country Code must comply with applicable local radio regulations.
3.1.3 Transmit Power Compliance With Regulations
CAUTION
In regions where local radio regulations limit the maximum transmit power of the unit the installer is
responsible to properly set the Antenna Gain parameter (if configurable) according to the actual
antenna being used. This will limit the upper limits of the Tx Power parameter in the AU and the
Maximum Tx Power in the SU (where applicable) to the value of "Permitted EIRP-Antenna Gain".
The Tx Power parameter in the AU and the Maximum Tx Power in the SU (where applicable) should
not exceed the Permitted EIRP-Antenna Gain, according to the following table:

Table 3-2: Regulation Maximum EIRP
Country Code Maximum EIRP (dBm)
20 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 5 MHz Bandwidth

Japan 4.9 GHz 34 34 (NOTE 1) NA
FCC 5.3 GHz 30 (NOTE 3) 27 (NOTE 2) NA
FCC 5.4 GHz 30 27 NA
ETSI 5.4 GHz 30 27 NA
ETSI-F 5.4 GHz 30 27 NA
Australia 5.4 GHz 30 27 NA
Universal 5.4 GHz AU: 38 AU: 38 NA

SU: 49 SU: 49
FCC 5.8 GHz AU: 36 AU: 36 NA

SU: No Limit (PtMP) SU: No Limit (PtMP)
UK 5.8 GHz 36 33 NA
Australia 5.8 GHz 36 36 NA
India 5.8 GHz 36 33 NA
Germany 5.8 GHz 36 33 NA
Universal 5.8 GHz AU: 36 AU: 36 NA

SU: No Limit (PtMP) SU: No Limit (PtMP)
NOTE 1 (Japan 4.9 GHz, 10 MHz Bandwidth):
In BreezeACCESSVL units operating in the 4.9 GHz Japan band (not B&B
point-to-point) with a 10 MHz bandwidth, the following rules must be met for full
compliance with regulations:
1 When operating at 4945 MHz, the Transmit Power parameter in the AU should
not be set to a value above 11 dBm. The Maximum Transmit Power of the SU
should not be set to a value above 10 dBm.
not be set to a value above 13 dBm. The Maximum Transmit power of the SU
This requirement, although not indicated in the certification document, is needed

following the tests performed in the certification lab.
NOTE 2 (FCC 5.3 GHZ, 10 MHz Bandwidth)
For full compliance with FCC regulation of units with HW rev C using a 10 MHz
bandwidth, if you wish to include frequency channel 5265 MHz in the set of

frequencies to be used, then the Transmit Power parameter in the AU, and the
Maximum Tx Power parameter in the SUs, should not be set to a value above
"25-Antenna Gain". If there is a need to use a higher value for these parameters,
this frequency should not be used.
For full compliance with FCC regulations, the following requirements should be
followed in units using a 20 MHz bandwidth:
1 In units HW Revision B, if you wish to include frequency channel 5270 MHz in

the set of frequencies to be used, then the Transmit Power parameter in the
AU, and the Maximum Tx Power parameter in the SUs, should not be set to a
value above "17-Antenna Gain". If there is a need to use a higher value for
these parameters, this frequency should not be used.
2 In units with HW Revision C, if you wish to include one or more of frequency

channels 5270, 5275 and 5330 MHz in the set of frequencies to be used, then
the Transmit Power parameter in the AU, and the Maximum Tx Power
parameter in the SUs, should not be set to a value above "20-Antenna Gain". If
there is a need to use a higher value for these parameters, this frequency
should not be used.

Chapter 3 - Commissioning Using the Optional Y-cable (New SU A/E ODU)
3.2 Using the Optional Y-cable (New SU A/E

ODU)
A special Y-cable, available from Alvarion, enables to connect a portable PC

directly to the IDU COM port of the SU-A/E-ODU. This enables the installer to
perform the entire process of configuring basic parameters, aligning the antenna
and verifying proper operation of the unit right after completing the installation,
minimizing the number of times the installer must climb to the roof. It also
enables simpler configuration/performance monitoring during various
maintenance/testing actions.
Figure 3-1: Connecting the Y-cable

Chapter 3 - Commissioning Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna
3.3 Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna
NOTE
This antenna alignment process described in this section is applicable to both the SU-A/E-ODU and
the SU-I antenna, unless stated otherwise.
The SNR bar display is located on the bottom panel of the SU-A/E-ODU/front
panel of the SU-I indoor unit. The ten LEDs indicate the quality of the received
signal. The higher the number of green LEDs indicating On, the higher the quality
of the received signal. This section describes how to align the Subscriber Unit
antenna using the SNR bar display.
For optimal alignment, it is recommended to use the Continuous Average

SNR/RSSI Display option (see “Continuous Average SNR/RSSI Display” on
page 119). It is recommended to also verify the quality of the uplink using the
Continuous Uplink Quality Indicator Display option (see “Continuous UpLink
Quality Indicator Display” on page 120) when there is traffic in the uplink.
NOTE
Antenna alignment using the SNR bar display or the Continuous Average SNR/RSSI Display is
possible only after the Subscriber Unit is associated with an Access Unit. The associated Access
Unit must be operational and the basic Subscriber Unit parameters must be correctly configured.
Otherwise, the unit will not be able to synchronize with the Access Unit. As the SNR measurement
is performed on received frames, its results are meaningless unless the Subscriber Unit is
associated with an Access Unit.
To align the Subscriber Unit antenna:
1 Align the antenna by pointing it in the general direction of the Base Station.
2 Verify that the power indication of the unit ( / ) is On.
3 Verify that the W-LINK LED ( / ) of the ODU is On, indicating that the unit
is associated with an Access Unit. If the W-LINK LED is Off, check that the
ESSID and Frequency parameters are correctly configured. If the SU is still
not associated with the AU, increase the transmit power level to its maximum
value. If the unit is still not associated with the AU, improve the quality of the
link by changing the direction of the antenna or by placing the antenna at a
higher or alternate location.

Chapter 3 - Commissioning Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna
4 Rotate the antenna until the maximum SNR reading is achieved, where at
least 1 green LED is on. If you encounter prolonged difficulty in illuminating
the minimum required number of green LEDs, try to improve the reception
quality by placing the antenna at a higher point or in an alternate location.
5 Ensure that the front of the antenna is always facing the Base Station.
However, in certain conditions, such as when the line of site to the Base
Station is hampered, better reception may be achieved using a reflected signal.
In this case, the antenna is not always directed toward the Base Station.
6 Secure the unit firmly to the pole (SU-A-ODU or the antenna connected to
SU-E-ODU)/fasten the rotation screws (SU-I antenna).
NOTE
In some cases, the antenna may need to be tilted to ensure that the level at which the SU receives
transmissions from the AU (and vice versa) is not too high. As a rule of thumb, if the SU is located at
a distance of less than 300 meters from the AU, it is recommended to up-tilt the antenna by
approximately 10° to 15°. To guarantee a safety margin from the saturation level, the SNR should
not be higher than 50 dB. The orange LED of the SNR bar indicates that the SNR is higher than 50
dB.

Chapter 3 - Commissioning Configuring the Subscriber Unit's Maximum Modulation Level
3.4 Configuring the Subscriber Unit's

Maximum Modulation Level
This section describes how to configure the maximum modulation level for
Subscriber Units.
NOTE
If the unit is associated with the AU, then the final configuration of the Maximum Modulation Level
parameter may be performed remotely, for example, from the site of the AU or from another site.
To configure the Maximum Modulation Level:
1 If the SNR of the SU at the AU is too low, it is recommended that you configure
the Maximum Modulation Level parameter to a value that is lower than the
maximum supported by the unit. This can decrease the number of
retransmissions due to attempts to transmit at modulation levels that are too
high for the actual quality of the link.
2 Check the SNR of the SU at the AU. You can use Telnet to view the SNR values
in the MAC Address Database, which can be accessed from the Site Survey
menu. If the ATPC algorithm is not enabled in both AU and SU, the test should
be done with the Initial Power Level at the SU configured to its maximum
value. If the SNR is lower than the values required for the maximum
modulation level according to Table 3-3, it is recommended that you decrease
the value of the Maximum Modulation Level.
NOTE
The SNR measurement at the AU is accurate only when receiving transmissions from the
applicable SU. If necessary, use the Ping Test utility in the Site Survey menu to verify data
transmission.
3 Configure the Maximum Modulation Level according to Table 3-3, using the
typical SNR values. It is recommended that a 2 dB margin be added to
compensate for possible measurement inaccuracy or variance in the quality of
the link.

Chapter 3 - Commissioning Configuring the Subscriber Unit's Maximum Modulation Level
Table 3-3: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level*
SNR Maximum Modulation Level

SNR > 23 dB 8
21 dB < SNR < 23 dB 7
16 dB < SNR < 21 dB 6
13 dB < SNR < 16 dB 5
10 dB < SNR < 13 dB 4
8 dB < SNR < 10 dB 3
7 dB < SNR < 8 dB 2
6 dB < SNR < 7 dB 1
* The maximum supported value depends on the unit's HW revision and on the Max Modulation Level
according to the Sub-Band.

Chapter 3 - Commissioning Operation Verification
3.5 Operation Verification
The following sections describe how to verify the correct functioning of the
Outdoor Unit, Indoor Unit, Ethernet connection and data connectivity.
3.5.1 Outdoor Unit Verification

To verify the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit, examine the LED indicators
located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit.
The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications.
NOTE
Verifying the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit using the LEDs, as described below, is only
possible after the configuration and alignment processes are completed.
Table 3-4: AU-ODU LEDs

W-LINK Wireless Link Green - Unit is associated with one or more SUs
Indictor
Blinking red - No associations
Off - Wireless link is disabled

Status Self-test and power Green - Power is available and self-test passed.
indication
Blinking Amber - Testing (not ready for operation)
Red - Self-test failed - fatal error

ETH Ethernet activity/ Green -Ethernet link detected.
connectivity
indication Amber - No Ethernet connectivity between the indoor
and outdoor units.

Table 3-5: SU-ODU LEDs

W-LINK Wireless Link Green - Unit is associated with an AU, no wireless
Indictor link activity
Blinking Green - Data received or transmitted on the

wireless link. Blinking rate is proportional to wireless
traffic rate
Off - Wireless link is disabled

Status Self-test and power Green - Power is available and self-test passed.
indication
Red - Self-test failed - fatal error

ETH Ethernet activity/ Green - Ethernet link between the indoor and
connectivity outdoor units is detected, no activity
indication
Blinking Green - Ethernet connectivity is OK, with
traffic on the port. Blinking rate proportional to traffic
rate.
Red - No Ethernet connectivity between the indoor

and outdoor units.
SNR BAR Received signal Red LED: Signal is too low (SNR<4 dB)
(SU-RA) strength Indication
8 green LEDs: Quality of the received signal
Orange LED: Signal is too high (SNR > 50 dB)
Table 3-6: SU-ODU SNR Bar LED Functionality
SNR Bar LEDs SNR (typical)

LED 1 (red) is On Signal is too low (SNR < 4 dB)
LED 2 (green) is On SNR > 4 dB
LEDs 2 to 3 (green) are On SNR > 8 dB

Table 3-6: SU-ODU SNR Bar LED Functionality

LEDs 2 to 9 (green) and 10 (orange) are Signal is too high (SNR > 50 dB)
On
3.5.2 Indoor Unit Verification

To verify the correct operation of the indoor equipment, examine the LED
indicators located on the top panel of the SU IDU and AU IDU units, or on the
front panel of the BS-AU module.
Table 3-7 provides information for the BS-AU IDU LEDs. Table 3-8 lists the LEDs
of the PS1073 IDU.
Table 3-7: BS-AU LEDs

W-LINK Wireless link activity Green - At least one SU is associated.
Blinking Red - No SU is associated.
Off - Wireless link is disabled.

ODU CURRENT Current Consumption of the Red - over current.
CONSUMPTION Outdoor Unit
Blinking Red - open circuit or below anticipated
current consumption.
Green - within tolerance.

ODU STATUS Outdoor Unit Self-test Green - Self test passed and ODU ready for
operation.
Red - fatal failure.

IDU PWR Power indication for the Green - IDU power is OK.
Indoor Unit
Off - no power is supplied to the IDU.
ALARM Indoor Unit Alarm Indication Red - a fatal failure indication.
Off - IDU is functioning properly.

Table 3-8: PS1073 SU IDU / AU-SA IDU LEDs

POWER Power Indication Green - IDU power is OK
Off - No power or power failure

ETH Self test and Off - No Ethernet connectivity has been detected
end-to-end between the outdoor unit and the device
Ethernet connected to the indoor unit.
connectivity
Green - Self-test passed and Ethernet connection
confirmed by the outdoor unit (Ethernet integrity
check passed).
3.5.3 SU-I Unit Verification

To verify the correct operation of the SU-I unit, examine the LED indicators
located on the front panel of the SU-I unit.
The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications.
Table 3-9: SU-I LEDs

Status Self-test and power Green: Power is available and self-test
indication passed.
Blinking Amber: Testing (not ready for

operation)
Red: Self-test failed. Fatal error

Ethernet Ethernet activity/ Green: Ethernet link between the SU-I and the
connectivity indication data equipment is detected, no activity
Blinking Green: Ethernet connectivity is OK,

with traffic on the port. Blinking rate
proportional to traffic rate.
Red: No Ethernet connectivity between the

SU-I and the data equipment.
W-Link Wireless Link traffic Green: Unit is associated with an AU, no

Indication wireless link activity
Blinking Green: Data received or transmitted

on the wireless link. Blinking rate is
proportional to traffic rate.
Off: Wireless link disabled

Table 3-10: SU-I SNR Bar LED Functionality

LED 1 (red) is On Signal is too low (SNR < 4 dB)
LED 2 (green) is On SNR > 4 dB
LEDs 2 to 9 (green) and 10 (orange) are On Signal is too high (SNR > 50 dB)
3.5.4 Verifying the Ethernet Connection (Modular

Base station)
After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet, verify that the Ethernet Integrity
Indicator, which is the yellow LED embedded in the 10/100 BaseT connector, is
on. This indicates that the unit is connected to an Ethernet segment. The
Ethernet Activity Indicator, which is the green embedded LED, should blink
whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the 10/100 BaseT port.
3.5.5 Verifying the Indoor-to-Outdoor Connection

(Modular Base Station)
After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet, verify that the Ethernet Integrity
Indicator, which is the yellow LED embedded in the RADIO connector, is on. This
indicates that the unit has detected an Ethernet link connection. The Ethernet
Activity Indicator, which is the green embedded LED, should blink whenever the
unit receives or transmits traffic on the RADIO port.
3.5.6 Verifying Data Connectivity

To verify data connectivity, from the end-user's PC or from a portable PC
connected to the unit, ping the Access Unit, or try to connect to the Internet.

Chapter 4
Operation and Administration
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
In This Chapter:
“Working with the Monitor Program” on page 87
“Menus and Parameters” on page 90

Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration Working with the Monitor Program
4.1 Working with the Monitor Program
4.1.1 Accessing the Monitor Program Using Telnet

1 Connect a PC to the Ethernet port, using a crossed cable.
2 Configure the PC's IP parameters to enable connectivity with the unit. The
default IP address is 10.0.0.1.
3 Run the Telnet program. The Select Access Level menu is displayed.
4 Select the required access level, depending on your specific access rights. A
password entry request is displayed. Table 4-1 lists the default passwords for
each of the access levels.
Table 4-1: Default Passwords
Access Rights Password

Read-Only public
Installer private
Administrator
NOTE
Following three unsuccessful login attempts (using incorrect passwords), the monitor program is
blocked for several minutes. To enable access to the monitor program during that time, the unit
must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting/reconnecting power.
If you forgot the password, type "h" at the Access Level selection prompt. Type "Recover" at the
prompt to get a challenge string consisting of 8 characters. Contact Alvarion's Customer Service
and give them the challenge string (after user identification) to receive a one-time password.
Aftering entering this password at the prompt, the unit will reboot with the default Administrator
password (private). Three consecutive errors in entering the one-time password will invalidate it and
block the monitor program. A new challenge string should be used to receive a new one-time
password.
5 Enter your password and press Enter. The Main Menu is displayed as shown
in Figure 4-1. The unit type and location (if configured), SW version number
and SW release date displayed in the Main Menu vary according to the
selected unit and SW version.

BreezeACCESS VL/<Unit Type>/<Unit Location>

Official Release Version - <Version Number>
Release Date: <Date and Time>
Main Menu
==========
1 - Info Screens
2 - Unit Control
3 - Basic Configuration
4 - Site Survey
5 - Advanced Configuration
x - Exit
>>>
Figure 4-1: Main Menu (Administrator Level)
NOTE
If the Telnet session is not terminated properly; for example, if you simply close the window, the
monitor program is blocked for several minutes. To enable access to the monitor program during
that time, the unit must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting/reconnecting power.
The display of the Main Menu varies depending on the user's access level, as
follows.
For users with read only access rights, only the Info Screens option is
displayed. Users with this access level are not able to access the Unit Control,
Basic Configuration, Site Survey and Advanced Configuration menus.
For users with Installer access rights, the first four menu items, Info Screens,
Unit Control, Basic Configuration and Site Survey, are displayed. Users with
this access level are not able to access the Advanced Configuration menu.
For users with Administrator access rights, the full Main Menu is displayed.
These users can access all menu items.
4.1.2 Common Operations

The following describes the standard operations used when working with the
Monitor program.
Type an option number to open or activate the option. In certain cases you
may need to press Enter.
Press Esc to exit a menu or option.

NOTE
The program is automatically terminated following a determined period of inactivity. The default time
out is 5 minutes and is configured with the Log Out Timer parameter.
In some cases, to activate any configuration changes, you must reset the unit.
Certain settings are automatically activated without having to reset the unit. Refer
to Appendix E for information on which parameters are run time configurable,
which means that the unit need not be reset for the parameter to take effect, and
which parameters do require that the unit be reset.

Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters
4.2 Menus and Parameters
The following sections describe the menus and parameters provided by the
Monitor program.
4.2.1 Main Menu

The Main Menu enables to access the following menus, depending on your access
level, as described in section “Working with the Monitor Program” on page 87.
Info Screens: Provides a read only display of current parameter values.

Available at all access levels.
Unit Control: Enables to access general operations, such as resetting the

unit, reverting to factory default parameters, changing passwords and
switching between software versions. Available at the Installer and
Administrator access levels.
Basic Configuration: Enables to access the set of parameters that are

configured during the installation process. These parameters are also available
in the Advanced Configuration menu. Available at the Installer and
Administrator access levels.
Site Survey: Enables to activate certain tests and view various system
counters. Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels.
Advanced Configuration: Enables to access all system parameters, including

the Basic Configuration parameters. Available only at the Administrator access
level.
4.2.2 Info Screens Menu

The Info Screens menu enables you to view the current values of various
parameter sets. The parameter sets are identical to the main parameter groups in
the configuration menus. You can view a specific parameter set or choose to view
all parameters at once. While this menu is available at all access levels, some
security related parameters including the encryption Keys, ESSID and Operator
ESSID are only displayed to users with Administrator access rights.
The Info Screens menu includes the following options:
Show Unit Status

Show Basic Configuration
Show Advanced Configuration
Show Country Dependent Parameters
Show All Parameters
4.2.2.1 Show Unit Status

The Show Unit Status menu is a read only menu that displays the current values
of the following parameters:
Unit Name: As defined in the Unit Control menu.
Unit Type: Identifies the unit's function.
Unit MAC Address: The unit's unique IEEE MAC address.
Current Number of Associations (AU only): The total number of SUs

associated with this AU. This number may include units that are not currently
active or associated.
NOTE
An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions:
The SU failed to respond to 100 consecutive data frames transmitted by the AU and is
considered to have "aged out".
During the last 6 minutes (or more) the SU did not transmit any data frame, and failed to
respond to certain frames that typically are transmitted by the AU every 10 seconds. Since the
sampling interval for this state is about 10 minutes, it means that the decision to remove the SU
from the Associations Database will take place between 6 to 16 minutes from the time the SU
ceased sending data or responding to these "keep-alive" frames (for AUS the sampling interval
is 1 minute, meaning decision time of 6 to 7 minutes).
Number of Associations Since Last Reset: For SUs - displays the total
number of associations with any AU since the last reset, including duplicate
associations with the same AU. For AUs - displays the number of SUs that
have associated with the AU since the last reset, including duplicate
associations with the same SU.
Number of Rejections since Last Reset: Applicable only for AU when the
Hidden ESSID feature is enabled. Displays the number of times that any unit

attempting to associate with the AU was rejected because of a non-matching

ESSID (including multiple rejections of the same unit).
Unit Status (SU only): The current status of the SU. There are three status
options:
» SCANNING: The SU is searching for an AU with which to associate. If DFS

is enabled and the SU is currently looking for its previous AU, the AU's
MAC Address will be displayed.
» ASSOCIATED: The SU is associated with an AU.
» AUTHENTICATING: This is typically a temporary status. For example,

when an SU hears the beacons of an AU, tries to associate and the AU does
not respond because it does not hear the SU's packets.
AU MAC Address (SU only): The MAC address of the AU with which the unit is
currently associated. If the unit is not associated with any AU, the address
defaults to the IEEE broadcast address, which is FF FF FF FF FF FF.
Unit Hardware Version: The version of the outdoor unit hardware.
Unit BOOT Version: The version of the BOOT SW.
Time Since Last Reset
Flash Versions:
» Running from: Shows whether the unit is running from the Main or from
the Shadow Version.
» Main Version File Name: The name of the compressed file (with a ".bz"
extension) of the version currently defined as the main version.
» Main Version Number: The software version currently defined as the main
version.
» Shadow Version File Name: The name of the compressed file (with a ".bz"
extension) of the version currently defined as the shadow (backup) version.
» Shadow Version Number: The software version currently defined as the

shadow (backup) version.

Radio Band: The radio band of the unit.
Log Out Timer: The value of the Log Out Timer as defined in the Unit Control
menu.
Country Code: The 3 or 4 digits Country Code used by the unit and its
general description.
Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode: The Ethernet port negotiation mode as

defined in the Unit Control menu.
Ethernet Port State: The actual state of the Ethernet port.
FTP Parameters: General FTP parameters (common to SW Version Download,

Configuration File Upload/Download and Event File Upload using FTP):
» FTP Server IP Address
» FTP Gateway IP Address
» FTP User Name
» FTP Password
FTP Software Download Parameters: The parameters for SW download using

FTP, as defined in Unit Control menu.
» FTP SW Version File Name
» FTP Source Directory
Configuration File Download/Upload Parameters: The parameters for

Configuration file upload/download using FTP, as defined in the Unit Control
menu.
» Configuration File Name
» Configuration File Source Directory
» Operator Defaults File Name

FTP Log File Upload Parameters: The parameters for Event Log file upload
using FTP, as defined in the Unit Control menu.
» FTP Log File Name
» FTP Log File Destination Directory
Event Log Minimum Severity
ATE Test Status: Indicates the result of the unit's final testing in production.
In units supplied with SW version 4.5 and higher should always be PASS. In
units upgraded from a version below 4.5 this parameter will be NONE.
Serial Number: The Serial Number of the unit. Applicable only to units
supplied with SW version 4.5 and higher. In units upgraded from a version
below 4.5 this parameter will be none (empty).
SU-54 Support (AUS only): Supported or Not Supported. Indicates whether

the AUS can support SU-54 units (support of SU-54 units by AUS is a licensed
feature available for all AUS units).
Wireless Link Prioritization Support (AU only): Supported or Not

Supported. Indicates whether the unit supports the Wireless Link
Prioritization feature (Wireless Link Prioritization is a licensed feature).
4.2.2.2 Show Basic Configuration

The Show Basic Configuration menu is a read only menu that displays the current
values of the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu.
4.2.2.3 Show Advanced Configuration

The Show Advanced Configuration menu enables to access the read only sub
menus that display the current values of the parameters included in the
applicable sub menus of the Advanced Configuration menu.
4.2.2.4 Show Country Dependent Parameters

Each country has its radio regulation regarding transmissions in the applicable
bands that affect parameters such as available frequencies, bandwidth, transmit
power, etc. Some other parameters and options may also vary among countries.
For each country, one or more sets of parameters are pre-configured in the
factory. If more than one set is available, the set to be used can be selected. The

Show Country Dependent Parameters displays the available set(s) of these

parameters, and includes the following:
Country Code: The up to 3 digits country code according to ISO 3166 and the
country name. Some regulatory requirements apply to more than one country.
In these cases the Country Code includes a 4 digits proprietary group code
and the Country Group name (for example FCC).
Data Encryption Support: Indicates whether data encryption is supported for

the applicable country.
AES Encryption Support: Indicates whether encryption using AES is

supported for the applicable country.
Authentication Encryption Support: Indicates whether authentication

encryption is supported for the applicable country.
For each of the available sets (Sub-Bands), the following information is provided:
Sub-Band ID and Frequencies
Allowed Bandwidth: If more than one bandwidth is allowed, then each

bandwidth is associated with a different sub-band, as the bandwidth may
affect the available frequencies.
Regulation Max Tx Power at Antenna Port: The maximum transmit power

allowed at the antenna port of the unit.
Regulation Max EIRP: The maximum allowed EIRP (Effective Isotropic

Radiated Power) in dBm, or No Limit.
Min Modulation Level: The lowest allowed modulation level.
Max Modulation Level: The highest allowed modulation level.
Burst Mode: Indicates whether Burst Mode operation is allowed.
Maximum Burst Duration: If Burst Mode is allowed, this parameter displays

the upper limit for the Maximum Burst Duration.

DFS Option: Indicates whether the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection)

mechanism for identification and avoidance of channels with radar activity is
supported.
Minimum HW Revision Support: The minimum HW revision required to

support the Sub-Band.
New Country Code files can be uploaded remotely using TFTP (see Appendix B).
4.2.2.5 Show All Parameters

The Show All Parameters menu is a read only menu that displays the current
values of all status and configuration parameters.
NOTE
The values of some security related parameters, including the encryption Keys, ESSID and
Operator ESSID, are available only with Administrator access rights.
4.2.3 Unit Control Menu

The Unit Control menu enables configuring control parameters for the unit. The
Unit Control menu includes the following options:
Reset Unit
Default Settings
Change Unit Name
Change Password
Flash Memory Control
Log Out Timer
Ethernet Negotiation Mode
Change System Location
Event Log Menu
Feature Upgrade

SW Version Download
Configuration File Upload/Download
4.2.3.1 Reset Unit

The Reset Unit option enables resetting the unit. After reset, any modifications
made to the system parameters are applied.
4.2.3.2 Default Settings

The Set defaults submenu enables resetting the system parameters to a
predefined set of defaults or saving the current configuration as the set of
Operator Defaults.
The Default Setting options are available only to users with Administrator access
rights.
The available options are:
Set Defaults
Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults
4.2.3.2.1 Set Defaults

The Set Defaults submenu enables reverting the system parameters to a
predefined set of defaults. There are two sets of default configurations:
A Factory Defaults: This is the standard default configuration.
B Operator Defaults: Operator Defaults configuration can be defined by the

Administrator using the Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults
option in this menu. It may also be defined at the factory according to specific
operator's definition. The default Operator Defaults configuration is the
Factory Defaults configuration.
The current configuration file and the Operator Defaults configuration file can be
uploaded/downloaded by the unit using FTP. For more information, see section
“Configuration File Upload/Download” on page 108 option. These files can also be
uploaded/downloaded remotely using TFTP (see Appendix B).
The available options in the Set Defaults submenu are:
Set Complete Factory Defaults
Set Partial Factory Defaults

Set Complete Operator Defaults
Set Partial Operator Defaults
Cancel Current Pending Request
4.2.3.2.1.1 Set Complete Factory Defaults

Select this option to reset the unit to the standard Factory Defaults configuration,
excluding several parameters that are listed in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2: Parameters not changed after Set Complete Factory/Operator Defaults
Parameters Group Parameter

Unit Control Parameters All Passwords
FTP Server IP address* (see note below)
FTP Gateway IP address* (see note below)
FTP User Name* (see note below)
FTP Password* (see note below)
Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode
Air Interface Parameters Selected Sub-Band (AU)
Frequency (AU)
DFS Required by Regulations (AU)
Frequency Subset (AU)
Antenna Gain (AU)
Country Code Parameters Selected Country Code
NOTE
The FTP parameters are not set to their default values after Set Complete Operator Defaults.
However, they are set to their default value after Set Complete Factory Defaults. Note that in this
case they are set to the default values immediately upon selecting the Set Complete Factory
Default option (even before the next reset).
4.2.3.2.1.2 Set Partial Factory Defaults

Select this option to reset the unit to the standard Factory Default configuration,
excluding the parameters that are required to maintain connectivity and
management access. The parameters that do not change after Set Partial Factory
Defaults are listed in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3: Parameters that are not changed after Set Partial Factory/Operator Defaults

Unit Control parameters Passwords
Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode
FTP Server IP address
FTP Gateway IP Address
FTP User Name
FTP Password
IP Parameters IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway Address
DHCP Option
Access to DHCP
Security Parameters Authentication Algorithm
Default Key (SU)
Data Encryption Mode
Default Multicast Key (AU)
Security Mode
Key # 1 to Key # 4


Air Interface Parameters ESSID
Operator ESSID Option (AU)
Operator ESSID (AU)
Hidden ESSID Option (AU)
Hidden ESSID Support (SU)
Hidden ESSID Timeout (SU)
Cell Distance Mode (AU)
Maximum Cell Distance (AU)
Per SU Distance Learning Option (AU)
Selected Sub-Band (AU)
Frequency (AU)
DFS Required by Regulations (AU)
SU Waiting Option (AU)
Channel Reuse Option (AU)
Radar Activity Assessment Period (AU)
Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period (AU)
Frequency Subset (AU)
ATPC Option (AU)
Transmit Power
Maximum Tx Power (SU)
Tx Control (AU)
Best AU Support (SU)
Preferred AU MAC Address (SU)
All Noise Immunity Control parameters
All Noise Floor Calculation parameters
Network Management Wi2 IP Address (SU)

Parameters
Performance Parameters Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds


Bridge Parameters VLAN ID - Management
Service Provider VLAN ID (SU)
VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype
MAC Address List (AU)
MAC Address List Action (AU)
Service Parameters DRAP Option (AU)
UDP Port (AU)
Max Number of Voice Calls (AU)
DRAP TTL (AU)
Wireless Link Prioritization Option (AU)
Low Priority AIFS (AU)
Number of HW Retries for High Priority Traffic (AU)
Number of HW Retries for Low Priority Traffic (AU)
AU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic (AU)
AU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic (AU)
SU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic (AU)
SU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic (AU)
Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent
Country Code Parameters Selected Country Code
4.2.3.2.1.3 Set Complete Operators Defaults

Select this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defaults configuration,
excluding several parameters that are listed in Table 4-2.
4.2.3.2.1.4 Set Partial Operator Defaults

Select this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defaults configuration,
excluding the parameters that are required to maintain connectivity and
management access. The parameters that do not change after Set Partial Operator
Defaults are listed in Table 4-3.
4.2.3.2.1.5 Cancel Current Pending Request

After selecting one of the Set defaults options, it will be executed after the next
reset. This option enables to cancel the pending request before execution
(provided the unit has not been reset yet).

4.2.3.2.2 Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults

The Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults enables defining the
current configuration of the unit as the Operator Defaults configuration.
4.2.3.3 Change Unit Name

The Change Unit Name option enables changing the name of the unit, which is
also the system's name in the MIB2. The name of the unit is also used as the
prompt at the bottom of each Monitor window.
Valid values: A string of up to 32 printable ASCII characters.
The default unit name is an empty string.
4.2.3.4 Change Password

The Change Password submenu enables changing the access password(s). The
Change Password submenu is available only to users with Administrator access
rights.
Refer to section “Working with the Monitor Program” on page 87 for a list of the
default passwords for each of the access levels.
4.2.3.5 Flash Memory Control

The Flash Memory Control submenu enables selecting the active software version
for the unit.
The flash memory can store two software versions. One version is called Main and
the other is called Shadow. New software versions are loaded as the shadow
version. You can select the shadow version as the new active version by selecting
Reset and Boot from Shadow Version. However, after the next reset, the main
version is re-activated. To continue using the currently active version after the
next reset, select Use Running Version After Reset: The previous shadow
version will be the new main version, and vice versa.
The parameters configured in the unit are not changed as a result of loading new
software versions unless the new version includes additional parameters or
additional changes in the list of parameters. New parameters are loaded with their
default values.
Select from the following options:
Reset and Boot from Shadow Version: Activates the shadow (backup)
software version. The unit is reset automatically. Following the next reset the
unit will switch to the main version.

Use Running Version After Reset: Defines the current running version as the
new main version. This version will also be used following the next reset.
4.2.3.6 Log Out Timer

The Log Out Timer parameter determines the amount of inactive time following
which the unit automatically exits the Monitor program.
The time out duration can range from 1 to 999 minutes.
The default value is 5 minutes.
4.2.3.7 Ethernet Negotiation Mode

The Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode submenu displays the current Ethernet port
state and enables defining the negotiation mode of the Ethernet port. The
available options are:
Force 10 Mbps and Half-Duplex
Force 10 Mbps and Full-Duplex
Auto Negotiation (10/100 Mbps and Half/Full Duplex)
The default is Auto Negotiation (10/100 Mbps and Half/Full Duplex)
4.2.3.8 Change System Location

The Change System Location option enables changing the system location of the
unit, which is also the sys location in MIB2. The System Location is also displayed
as a part of the Monitor menu's header.
The default system location is an empty string.
4.2.3.9 Event Log Menu

The Event Log Menu enables controlling the event log feature. The event log is an
important debugging tool and a flash memory sector is dedicated for storing it.
Events are classified according to their severity level: Message (lowest severity),
Warning, Error or Fatal (highest severity).

The severity level of events that should be saved in the Event Log is configurable.
Events from the configured severity and higher are saved and may be displayed
upon request. Log history can be displayed up to the full number of current active
events. In the log, an event is defined as active as long as it has not been erased (a
maximum of 1000 events may be stored). The Event Log may be read using TFTP,
with remote file name <SNMP Read Community>.log (the default SNMP Read
Community is "public"). The Event Log may also be uploaded to a remote FTP
server.
The Event Log Menu includes the following options:
Event Log Policy
Display Event Log
Erase Event Log
Event Load Upload
4.2.3.9.1 Event Log Policy

The Event Log Policy determines the minimal severity level. All events whose
severity is equal to or higher than the defined severity are logged.
Valid values are: Message (MSG) Level, Warning (WRN) Level, Error (ERR) Level,
Fatal (FTL) Level, Log None.
The default selection is Warning Level severity.
4.2.3.9.2 Display Event Log

The Display Event Log option enables viewing how many events are logged and
selecting the number of events to be displayed (up to 1000). The display of each
event includes the event time (elapsed time since last reset), the severity level and
a message string. The events are displayed according to the time at which they
were generated, with the most recent event displayed last (first in - first out).
4.2.3.9.3 Erase Event Log

The Erase Event Log option enables clearing the event log.
4.2.3.9.4 Event Log Upload

The Event Log Upload submenu enables the optional uploading of the event log
file to a remote FTP server. The Event Log Upload submenu includes the following
options:

FTP Event Log Upload Execute: The FTP event Log Upload Execute executes
the upload of the Event Log file according to the parameters defined below.
Event Log Destination Directory: The Event Log Destination Directory

enables defining the destination directory for the Event Log File.
Valid values: A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters. To clear the field

press "."
The default is an empty string.
Event Log File Name: The Event Log File Name option enables defining the
name of the event log file to be uploaded.
The default is logfile.log.
FTP Server IP Address: The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the
IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: 10.0.0.253
FTP Gateway IP Address: The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables

defining the FTP default gateway address.
The default is: 0.0.0.0.
FTP User Name: The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name to
be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: vx
FTP Password: The FTP Password option enables defining the password to be
used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: vx

Show FTP Event Log File Upload Parameters: Displays the current values of
the Event Log Upload parameters.
NOTE
There is one set of general FTP parameters (FTP Server IP Address, FTP Gateway IP Address,
FTP User Name and FTP Password). This set (or relevant parts of the set) serves the SW
Download procedure, the Configuration File Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File
Upload procedure. Changing any of these parameters in the menu for either procedure will
automatically change its value in the menu for the other procedures.
4.2.3.10 Feature Upgrade

The Feature Upgrade option enables to enter a license string for upgrading the
unit to support new features and/or options. Upon selecting the Manual Feature
Upgrade option the user will be requested to enter the license string. Each license
string is associated with a unique MAC Address and one feature/option. If the
encrypted MAC Address in the license string does not match the unit's MAC
Address, the string will be rejected. If there is a match, a message notifying of the
new feature/option will be displayed. The unit must be reset for the change to
take effect.
The license string comprises 32 to 64 hexadecimal digits.
NOTE
If you are entering the license string using copy and paste operation, check carefully that the string
is copied properly. You may have to enter it manually due to potential problems in performing copy
and paste in Telnet.
New Feature License files can be uploaded remotely using TFTP (see Appendix B).
4.2.3.11 SW Version Download

The SW Version Download submenu enables the optional downloading of a SW
Version file from a remote FTP server. The SW Version Download submenu
includes the following options:
Execute FTP GET SW Version: The Execute FTP GET SW Version option
executes the SW Version FTP download according to the parameters defined
below.
FTP SW Source Dir: The FTP SW Source Dir option enables defining the
source directory of the SW version file.

press "."

FTP SW Version File Name: The FTP SW Version File Name option enables
defining the name of the SW version file in the FTP server.
Valid values: A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty string

is not allowed.
The default is VxWorks.bz.
FTP Server IP Address: The FTP Server IP Address option enables defining the
IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file.

be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file.
The default is: vx
used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file.
The default is: vx
Show SW Version Download Parameters and Status: Displays the current

values of the SW Version Download parameters, the current SW version and
the SW versions stored in the Flash memory.

NOTE
Download Procedure, the Configuration File Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File
Upload procedure. Changing any of these parameters in the menu for any procedure will
4.2.3.12 Configuration File Upload/Download

The Configuration File Upload/Download submenu enables the optional
uploading or downloading of a configuration or an Operator Defaults file from a
remote FTP server. The Configuration File Upload/Download submenu includes
the following options:
Execute FTP GET/PUT Configuration File: The Execute FTP GET/PUT

Configuration File executes the upload/download of a Configuration file or an
Operator Defaults file according to the parameters defined below. The
following options are available:
» Execute FTP Get Configuration File (cfg)
» Execute FTP Put Configuration File (cfg)
» Execute FTP Get Operator Defaults File (cmr)
» Execute FTP Put Operator Defaults File (cmr)
FTP Configuration File Source Dir: The FTP Configuration File Source Dir
option enables defining the source directory of the configuration/Operator
Defaults file.

press "."
Configuration File FTP File Name: The Configuration File FTP File Name
option enables defining the name of the configuration file to be
uploaded/downloaded.

is not allowed.
The default is config.cfg.

Operator Defaults FTP File Name: The Operator Defaults File Name option
enables defining the name of the Operator Defaults file to be
uploaded/downloaded.

is not allowed.
The default is operator.cmr.
FTP Server IP Address: The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the
IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: 10.0.0.253

be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: vx
used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: vx
Show Configuration File Upload/Download Parameters: Displays the

current values of the Configuration File Upload/Download parameters.
NOTE
Download procedure, the Configuration File Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File
Upload procedure. Changing any of these parameters in the menu for either procedure will

4.2.4 Basic Configuration Menu

The Basic Configuration menu includes all parameters required for the initial
installation and operation of the unit. After the unit is properly installed and
operational, additional parameters can be configured either locally or remotely
using Telnet or SNMP management.
NOTE
All parameters in the Basic Configuration menu are also available in the relevant sub menus of the
Advanced Configuration menu.
The Basic Configuration menu enables to access the following parameter sets:
4.2.4.1 IP Parameters
IP Address
Subnet Mask
DHCP Client:
» DHCP Option
» Access to DHCP
Refer to section “IP Parameters” on page 129 for a description of these parameters.
4.2.4.2 Performance Parameters
Maximum Modulation Level (SU)
Refer to section “Performance Parameters” on page 184 for a description of these

parameters.
4.2.4.3 Network Management Parameters
Wi2 IP Address (SU)
Refer to section “Wi2 IP Address (SU Only)” on page 167 for a description of
this parameter.

4.2.4.4 Air Interface Parameters
ESSID
Operator ESSID Parameters (AU):
» Operator ESSID Option
» Operator ESSID
Hidden ESSID Option (AU)
Hidden ESSID (SU):
» Hidden ESSID Support
» Hidden ESSID Timeout
Frequency Definition:
» Select Sub-Band (AU, if more than one is available)
» Frequency (AU)
» User Defined Frequency Subsets (SU)
» DFS Parameters (AU, if DFS is supported by Country Code):
◊ DFS Required By Regulations
◊ Frequency Subset Definition
◊ Channel Check Time
◊ Channel Avoidance Period
◊ SU Waiting Option
◊ Minimum Pulses to Detect
◊ DFS Detection Algorithm (Universal Country Codes in 5.4/5.8 GHz

bands)
◊ Clear Radar Detected Channels after Reset

Best AU Parameters (SU):
» Best AU Support
» Preferred AU MAC Address
Cell Distance Parameters (AU):
» Cell Distance Mode
» Maximum Cell Distance
» Fairness Factor
» Per SU Distance Learning
ATPC Parameters:
» ATPC Option
» ATPC Option for EZ
Transmit Power
Maximum Tx Power (SU)
Tx Control (AU)
Antenna Gain
Refer to section “Air Interface Parameters” on page 131 for a description of these
parameters.
4.2.4.5 Country Code Parameters
Country Code Select
Re-apply Country Code Values
Refer to section “Country Code Parameters” on page 211 for a description of these
parameters.

4.2.4.6 Bridge Parameters
VLAN Support:
» VLAN ID - Management
Refer to section “Bridge Parameters” on page 167 for a description of these

parameters.
4.2.4.7 Security Parameters
Authentication Algorithm
Data Encryption Option
Security Mode
Default Multicast Key (AU)
Default Key (SU)
Key 1 to Key 4
Promiscuous Authentication (AU)
Some or all of the security parameters may not be available in units that do not
support the applicable features. Refer to section “Security Parameters” on
page 208 for a description of these parameters.
4.2.5 Site Survey Menu

The Site Survey menu displays the results of various tests and counters for
verifying the quality of the wireless link. These tests can be used to help determine
where to position the units for optimal coverage, antenna alignment and
troubleshooting. The counters can serve for evaluating performance and
identifying potential problems. In the AU, there is also an extensive database for
all SUs served by it.
The Site Survey menu includes the following options:
Traffic Statistics
Ping Test

MAC Address Database
Link Quality (SU only)
Hidden ESSID Table (SU only)
Continuous Noise Floor Display (AU only)
Per Modulation Level Counters
Link Capability
4.2.5.1 Traffic Statistics

The traffic statistics are used to monitor, interpret and analyze the performance of
the wired and wireless links. The counters display statistics relating to wireless
link and Ethernet frames. The Traffic Statistics menu includes the following
options:
Display Counters: Select this option to display the current value of the
Ethernet and wireless link (WLAN) counters.
Reset Counters: Select this option to reset the counters.
4.2.5.1.1 Ethernet Counters

The unit receives Ethernet frames from its Ethernet port and forwards the frames
to its internal bridge, which determines whether each frame should be
transmitted to the wireless medium. Frames discarded by the unit's hardware
filter are not counted by the Ethernet counters. For units with HW revision B and
lower, the maximum length of a regular IEEE 802.1 Ethernet packet that can be
accepted from or transmitted to the Ethernet port is 1514 bytes, excluding CRC
and VLAN(s). For units with HW revision C and higher, the maximum length of an
Ethernet packet that can be accepted from or transmitted to the Ethernet port
(excluding CRC) is 1600 bytes, including VLAN(s) for single or double-tagged
packets.
The unit transmits valid data frames received from the wireless medium to the
Ethernet port, as well as internally generated frames, such as responses to
management queries and pings received via the Ethernet port.
The Ethernet Counters include the following statistics:

Total received frames via Ethernet: The total number of frames received
from the Ethernet port. This counter includes both invalid frames (with errors)
and valid frames (without errors).
Transmitted wireless to Ethernet: The number of frames transmitted by the

unit to the Ethernet port. These are generally frames received from the
wireless side, but also include frames generated by the unit itself.
4.2.5.1.2 WLAN Counters

The unit submits data frames received from the Ethernet port to the internal
bridge, as well as self generated control and wireless management frames. After a
unicast data frame is transmitted, the unit waits for an acknowledgement (ACK)
message from the receiving unit. Some control and wireless management frames,
as well as broadcast and multicast frames sent to more than one unit, are not
acknowledged. If an ACK is not received after a predefined time, which is
determined by the Maximum Cell distance parameter, the unit retransmits the
frame until an ACK is received. If an ACK is not received before the number of
retransmissions has reached a maximum predefined number, which is
determined by the Number of HW Retries parameter, the frame is dropped.
Each packet to be transmitted to the wireless link is transferred to one of three

queues: Low, Medium and High. Packets in the High queue have the highest
priority for transmission, and those in the Low queue have the lowest priority. The
packets in the High queue will be transmitted first. When this queue is emptied,
the packets in the Medium queue will be sent. Finally, when both the High and
Medium queues are empty, the packets in the Low queue will be sent.
Data packets are routed to either the High or Low queue, according to the queue
selected for them before the MIR/CIR mechanism (for more information see
section “Traffic Prioritization” on page 198).
Broadcasts/multicasts are routed to the Medium queue (applicable only for AU).
Control and wireless management frames generated in the unit are routed to the
High queue.
Any frame coming from the Ethernet port, which is meant to reach another
BreezeACCESS VL unit via the wireless port (as opposed to messages intended for
stations behind other BreezeACCESS VL units), is sent to the High queue,
regardless of the priority configuration.
The Wireless Link Counters include the following statistics:
Total transmitted frames to wireless: The number of frames transmitted to

the wireless medium. The total includes one count for each successfully

transmitted unicast frame (excluding retransmissions), and the number of

transmitted multicast and broadcast frames, including control and wireless
management frames. In the AU, there are also separate counters for the
following:
» Beacons (AU only)
» Management and Other Data frames, including successfully transmitted

unicast frames and multicast/broadcast data frames (excluding
retransmissions, excluding Beacons in AU)
Total Transmitted Unicasts (AU only): The number of unicast frames

successfully transmitted to the wireless medium, excluding retransmissions.
This count is useful for calculating the rates of retransmissions or dropped
frames, as only unicast frames are retransmitted if not acknowledged.
Total submitted frames (bridge): The total number of data frames submitted
to the internal bridge for transmission to the wireless medium. The count does
not include control and wireless management frames, or retransmissions.
There are also separate counts for each priority queue through which the
frames were routed (High, Mid and Low).
Frames dropped (too many retries): The number of dropped frames, which
are unsuccessfully retransmitted without being acknowledged until the
maximum permitted number of retransmissions. This count includes dropped
data frames as well as dropped control and wireless management frames.
Total retransmitted frames: The total number of retransmissions, including

all unsuccessful transmissions and retransmissions.
Total transmitted concatenated frames: The total number of concatenated

frames transmitted successfully to the wireless medium, excluding
retransmissions. There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that
include one frame (Single), two frames (Double) or more than two frames
(More). For more details refer to section “Concatenation Parameters” on
page 191.
Total Tx events: The total number of transmit events. Typically, transmission

events include cases where transmission of a frame was delayed or was

aborted before completion. The following additional counters are displayed to

indicate the reason for and the nature of the event:
» Dropped: The number of dropped frames, which are unsuccessfully

retransmitted without being acknowledged until the maximum permitted
number of retransmissions.
» Underrun: The number of times that transmission of a frame was aborted

because the rate of submitting frames for transmission exceeds the
available transmission capability.
» Others: The number of frames whose transmission was not completed or

delayed due to a problem other than those represented by the other
counters.
Total received frames from wireless: The total number of frames received
from the wireless medium. The count includes data frames as well as control
and wireless management frames. The count does not include bad frames and
duplicate frames. For a description of these frames, refer to Bad frames
received and Duplicate frames discarded below.
Total received data frames: The total number of data frames received from
the wireless medium, including duplicate frames. Refer to Duplicate frames
discarded below.
Total Rx events: The total number of frames that were not received properly.
The following additional counters are displayed to indicate the reason for the
failure:
» Phy: The number of Phy errors (unidentified signals).
» CRC: The number of frames received from the wireless medium containing
CRC errors.
» Overrun: The number of frames that were discarded because the receive
rate exceeded the processing capability or the capacity of the Ethernet
port.
» Decrypt: The number of frames that were not received properly due to a
problem in the data decryption mechanism.
» Other

Total received concatenated frames: The total number of concatenated

frames received from the wireless medium, including duplicate frames. There
are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame
(Single), two frames (Double) or more than two frames (More). For more details
refer to section “Concatenation Parameters” on page 191.
Bad fragments received: The number of fragments received from the wireless
medium containing CRC errors.
Duplicate frames discarded: The number of data frames discarded because

multiple copies were received. If an acknowledgement message is not received
by the originating unit, the same data frame can be received more than once.
Although duplicate frames are included in all counters that include data
frames, only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port.
Internally discarded MIR\CIR: The number of data frames received from the
Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR/CIR mechanism to avoid
exceeding the maximum permitted information rate.
4.2.5.2 Ping Test

The Ping Test submenu is used to control pinging from the unit and includes the
following options:
Destination IP Address: The destination IP address of the device being

pinged. The default IP address is 192.0.0.1.
Number of Pings to Send: The number of ping attempts per session. The
available range is from 0 to 9999. The default value is 1. Select 0 for
continuous pinging.
Ping Frame Length: The ping packet size. The available range is from 60 to
1472 bytes. The default value is 64 bytes.
Ping Frame Timeout: The ping frame timeout, which is the amount of time (in
ms) between ping attempts. The available range is from 100 to 60,000 ms. The
default value is 200 ms.
Start Sending: Starts the transmission of ping frames.
Stop Sending: Stops the transmission of ping frames. The test is

automatically ended when the number of pings has reached the value

specified in the No. of Pings parameter, described above. The Stop Sending
option can be used to end the test before completing the specified number of
pings, or if continuous pinging is selected.
Show Ping Test Values: Displays the current values of the ping test
parameters, the transmission status, which means whether it is currently
sending or not sending pings, the number of pings sent, and the number of
pings received, which means the number of acknowledged frames.
4.2.5.3 Link Quality (SU only)

The Link Quality submenu enables viewing continuously updated information on
the quality of the wireless link. The Link quality submenu includes the following
options:
4.2.5.3.1 Continuous Average SNR/RSSI Display

The Continuous Average SNR Display option displays continuously updated
information regarding the average quality of the received signal, using Signal to
Noise Ratio (SNR) and Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) measurements.
The average RSSI is calculated using the formula:
NewAvgRSSI = (PrevAvgRSSI*HistWeight) + CrtRSSI*(1 - HistWeight), where:
NewAvgRSSI = New Average RSSI
PrevAvgRSSI = Previous Average RSSI
CrtRSSI = RSSI of the current packet
HistWeight = History Weight
The History Weight is given by the next formula:
HistWeight = 0.9 / ( PastTime / 2SNR_Memory_Factor + 1 ), where
PastTime = time between the current packet and previous packet, in seconds
SNR_Memory_Factor = the Average SNR Memory Factor configurable parameter

(see “Average SNR Memory Factor” on page 188).
The SNR_Memory_Factor can be -1 in this case the history is not used and the
Average RSSI is the RSSI of the current packet.
The same formula is used also for calculating Average SNR (SNR values are used
instead of RSSI values).

Press the Esc key to abort the test.
4.2.5.3.2 Continuous Noise Floor Display

The Continuous Noise Floor Display option displays continuously updated
information regarding the average noise floor in the wireless link.
Click the Esc key to abort the test.
4.2.5.3.3 Continuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display

The Continuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display option displays continuously
updated information regarding the average quality of the wireless link to the AU,
using the dynamically updated average modulation level measurements. The Link
Quality Indicator (LQI) calculation is performed using the formula:
LQI = (0.9 x "Previous LQI") + (0.1 x "Last Successful Modulation Level").
Each successful transmit will be included in this average, by using the

modulation level in which the frame was successfully transmitted as the "Last
Successful Modulation Level".
In order to receive quick and reliable LQI measurements, there should be

sufficient traffic between the SU and the AU. It is recommended to have traffic of
at least 100 packets per second. The traffic can be generated either by an external
utility (FTP session, ping generator, etc.) or by the Ping Test option in the Site
Survey menu with the appropriate settings (see section “Ping Test” on page 118).
NOTE
If Limited Test is indicated next to the LQI results, it means that the results may not indicate the true
quality, as not all modulation levels from 1 to 8 are available. The limitation may be due to the HW of
the unit (HW Revision A), or the applicable parameters in the country code, or the configurable
Maximum Modulation Level parameter.
Click the Esc key to abort the test.
4.2.5.4 MAC Address Database

4.2.5.4.1 MAC Address Database in AU
The MAC Address Database option in the AU displays information regarding the
Subscriber Units associated with the AU, as well as bridging (forwarding)
information. When DRAP is supported, it enables viewing details on the active
Gateways in the sector. The following options are available:
Display Bridging and Association Info: The Display Bridging and Association
Info option displays a list of all the Subscriber Units and stations in the AU's
Forwarding Database. For stations behind an SU, the SU's MAC address is
also displayed (SU Address).

Each MAC address entry is followed by a description, which may include the
following:
» Et (Ethernet): An address learned from the Ethernet port.
» Vp (Virtual port): An address of a node behind an associated SU. For these

addresses, learned from the wireless port, the address of the applicable SU
is also displayed (in parenthesis).
» St (Static): An associated SU. For these entries, the following details are
also displayed for each SU: Unit Name, SW version, Unit Type, Distance
from the AU, IP Address, Wi2 IP Address as defined in the SU (or 0.0.0.0 for
none), ESSID.
» X: An SU that is included in the Deny List.
» Sp (Special): 3 addresses that are always present, including:
◊ The MAC address of the AU.
◊ Alvarion's Multicast address (01-20-D6-00-00-01. The system treats

this address as a Broadcast address.
◊ The Ethernet Broadcast address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF).
In addition, a summary table displays information about the Forwarding

Database (Bridging Info) and the Associated Subscriber Unitsii Database
(Association Info). Each database includes the following information:
» The current number of entries. For Bridging Info this includes the Et
(Ethernet) and the Vp (Virtual ports) entries. For Association Info this is
the number of the currently associated SUs.

NOTE
» The aging time specified for entries in these tables. The aging time for
Bridging Info is as specified by the Bridge Aging Time parameter. The
default is 300 seconds. There is no aging time for Association Info entries.
» The maximum number of entries permitted for these tables, which is 1021
(1024 minus the number of special Sp addresses as defined above) for
Bridging Info and as specified by the Maximum Number of Associations
parameter for Association Info. The default value of the Maximum Number
of Associations parameter is 512.
Display Association Info: Displays information regarding the Subscriber

Units associated with the AU. Each list entry includes the following
information:
» The MAC Address of the associated Subscriber Unit
» Age in seconds, indicating the elapsed time since receiving the last packet
from the Subscriber Unit.
» The value configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter of the
Subscriber Unit
» The Status of the Subscriber Unit. There are three options:
1 Associated
2 Authenticated
3 Not Authenticated (a temporary status)
The various status states are described below (this is a simplified

description of the association process without the effects of the Best AU
algorithm).

Table 4-4: Authentication and Association Process
Message Direction Status in AU

SU Status: Scanning
A Beacon with correct ESSID AU → SU -
SU Status: Synchronized
Authentication Request SU → AU Not authenticated
Authentication Successful AU → SU Authenticated
SU Status: Authenticated
Association Request SU → AU Authenticated
Association Successful AU → SU Associated
SU Status: Associated
ACK SU → AU Associated
Data Traffic SU ↔ AU Associated
» The SNR of the SU measured at the AU
» The RSSI of the SU measured at the AU
» The Unit Name of the SU
» The SW version of the SU
» The Unit Type of the SU
» Distance from the AU
» IP Address
» Wi2 IP Address as defined in the SU (or 0.0.0.0 for none)
» The ESSID of the SU

Database (Bridging Info). The database includes the following information:
» The current number of entries. This is the number of currently associated

SUs.

NOTE
» The aging time specified for entries in these table. There is no aging time
for Association Info entries.
» The maximum number of entries permitted for this table, which is specified
by the Maximum Number of Associations parameter. The default value of
the Maximum Number of Associations parameter is 512.
Show MIR/CIR Database: Displays information on the MIR/CIR support for

associated Subscriber Units.
Each entry includes the following information:
» The MAC address of the associated Subscriber Unit
» The values of the MIR and CIR parameters configured in the applicable SU
for the downlink (AU to SU) and for the uplink (SU to AU)
» The value configured in the applicable SU for the Maximum Delay

parameter
» The Unit Name of the SU
» The SW version of the SU
» The Unit Type of the SU
» IP Address
Display MAC Pinpoint Table: The MAC Pinpoint table provides for each of the
Ethernet stations (identified by the MAC Address) connected to either the AU
or to any of the SUs served by it, the identity (MAC Address) of the wireless
device to which they are connected.

Gateways Table: When the DRAP option is supported, the Gateways Table
provides details on the active Gateways connected to any of the SUs served by
the AU. For each Gateway, the displayed information includes:
» Gateway Type (VG-1D1V, VG-1D2V, NG-4D1W)
» IP Address
» Number of Voice Calls (applicable only to Voice Gateways)
4.2.5.4.2 MAC Address Database in SU

The MAC Address Database option in the SU displays information regarding the
Subscriber Units bridging (forwarding) information. The following option is
available:
Display Bridging and Association Info: The Display Bridging and Association
Info option displays a list of all the stations in the SU's Forwarding Database.
Each MAC address entry is followed by a description, which may include the
following:
» Et (Ethernet): An address learned from the Ethernet port
» St (Static): The associated AU
» Wl (Wireless): An address of a node behind the associated AU, learned via

the wireless port
» Sp (Special): 4 addresses that are always present, including:
◊ The MAC address of the SU
◊ Alvarion's Multicast address (01-20-D6-00-00-01. The system treats

this address as a Broadcast address.
◊ Alvarion's special Multicast address (01-20-D6-00-00-05), reserved for

future use.
◊ The Ethernet Broadcast address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF).

Database (Bridging Info). The summary table includes the current number of
entries, the aging time specified by the Bridge Aging Time parameter and the
maximum number of entries permitted for this table, which is 1020.

4.2.5.5 Continuous Noise Floor Display (AU only)

The Continuous Noise Floor Display option displays continuously updated
information regarding the average noise floor in the wireless link.
Click the Esc key to abort the display.
4.2.5.6 Hidden ESSID Table (SU only)

An SU with Hidden ESSID Support enabled (for details see “ESSID Parameters” on
page 131) that maintains a list with AUs that rejected association requests from
the SU because of a wrong ESSID. An AU will be kept in this list until the Hidden
ESSID Timeout expires for it or if the list is full and another AU that is not in the
list rejects the SU because of wrong ESSID.
The Hidden ESSID Table displays for each AU included in the list its MAC Address
and Age (elapsed time in minutes since it was added to the table).
4.2.5.7 Per Modulation Level Counters

The Per Modulation Level Counters display statistics relating to wireless link
performance at different radio modulation levels. The Per Modulation Level
Counters menu includes the following options:
Display Counters: Select this option to display the current values of the Per
Modulation Level Counters.
Reset Counters: Select this option to reset the Per Modulation Level Counters.
The statistics show the number of frames accumulated in different categories

since the last reset.
For SUs, the Per Modulation Level Counters display the following information for
each modulation level supported by the unit:
SUCCESS: The total number of successfully transmitted unicasts at the

applicable modulation level.
FAILED: The total number of failures to successfully transmit unicast frame

during a HW Retry cycle at the applicable modulation level.
In addition, the Average Modulation Level (AML) is also displayed. This is the
average modulation level (rounded to the nearest integer) since the last time the
Per Modulation Level counters were reset. The average is calculated using the
SUCCESS count at each modulation level as weights.

For AUs, the SUCCESS and FAILED counts are provided for each of the
associated SUs, which are identified by their MAC address.
4.2.5.8 Link Capability

The Link Capability option provides information on HW and SW capabilities of
relevant units. In an AU, the information provided in the Link Capability reports is
for all associated SUs. In an SU, the Link Capability reports include information
on all AUs in the neighboring AUs table (all AUs with whom the SU can
communicate).
The Link Capability feature enables to adapt the configuration of the unit
according to the capabilities of other relevant unit(s) to ensure optimal operation.
The Link Capability submenu includes the following options:
4.2.5.8.1 Show Link Capability-General

Select this option to view information on general parameters of relevant units. For
each relevant unit, identified by its MAC address, the following details are
displayed:
HwVer: the hardware version of the unit.
CpldVer: The version of the Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD) used
in the unit. This parameter is available only in AUs, displaying the CPLD
version in the relevant SU.
Country: The 3 or 4 digits country code supported by the unit.
SwVer: The SW version used by the unit. This parameter is available only in
SUs, displaying the SW version in the relevant AU.
BootVer: The Boot Version of the unit. This parameter is available only in
AUs, displaying the Boot version in the relevant SU.
4.2.5.8.2 Show Link Capability-Wireless Link Configuration

Select this option to view information on current wireless link parameters of
relevant units. For each relevant unit, identified by its MAC address, the following
details are displayed:
ATPC Option: Enable or Disable.
Adaptive Modulation Option: Enable or Disable.

Burst Mode Option: Enable or Disable.
DFS Option: Enable or Disable. This parameter is available only in SUs,

displaying the current option in the relevant AU.
Concatenation Option: Enable or Disable.
Country Code Learning by SU: Enable or Disable. This parameter is available

only in SUs, displaying the current option in the relevant AU.
Per SU Distance Learning: Enable or Disable. This parameter is available

only in SUs, displaying the current option in the relevant AU.
4.2.5.8.3 Show Link Capability-Security Configuration

Select this option to view information on current security related parameters of
relevant units. For each relevant unit, identified by its MAC address, the following
details are displayed:
Security Mode: WEP, AES OCB or FIPS 197.
Authentication Algorithm: Shared Key or Open System.
Data Encryption Option: Enable or Disable.
4.2.5.8.4 Show Link Capability by AU (SU only)

Select this option to view all capabilities information (General, wireless Link
Configuration, Security Configuration) of a selected AU (by its MAC address).
4.2.5.8.5 Show Link Capability by SU (AU only)

Select this option to view all capabilities information (General, Wireless Link
Configuration, Security Configuration) of a selected SU (by its MAC address).
4.2.6 Advanced Configuration Menu

The Advanced Configuration menu provides access to all parameters, including
the parameters available through the Basic Configuration menu.
The Advanced Configuration menu enables accessing the following menus:
IP Parameters
Air Interface Parameters

Network Management Parameters
Bridge Parameters
Performance Parameters
Service Parameters
Security Parameters
4.2.6.1 IP Parameters
The IP Parameters menu enables defining IP parameters for the selected unit and
determining its method of IP parameter acquisition.
The IP Parameters menu includes the following options:
IP Address
Subnet Mask
DHCP Client
4.2.6.1.1 IP Address
The IP Address parameter defines the IP address of the unit.
The default IP address is 10.0.0.1.
4.2.6.1.2 Subnet Mask

The Subnet Mask parameter defines the subnet mask for the IP address of the
unit.
The default mask is 255.0.0.0.
4.2.6.1.3 Default Gateway Address

The Default Gateway Address parameter defines the IP address of the unit's
default gateway.
The default value for the default gateway address is 0.0.0.0.
4.2.6.1.4 DHCP Client

The DHCP Client submenu includes parameters that define the method of IP
parameters acquisition.

The DHCP Client submenu includes the following options:
DHCP Option
Access to DHCP
4.2.6.1.4.1 DHCP Option

The DHCP Option displays the current status of the DHCP support, and allows
selecting a new operation mode. Select from the following options:
Select Disable to configure the IP parameters manually. If this option is

selected, configure the static IP parameters as described above.
Select DHCP Only to cause the unit to search for and acquire its IP
parameters, including the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway, from
a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server only. If this option is
selected, you must select the port(s) through which the unit searches for and
communicates with the DHCP server, as described in section “Access to
DHCP” on page 130. You do not have to configure static IP parameters for the
unit. DHCP messages are handled by the units as management frames.
Select Automatic to cause the unit to search for a DHCP server and acquire
its IP parameters from the server. If a DCHP server is not located within
approximately 40 seconds, the currently configured parameters are used. If
this option is selected, you must configure the static IP parameters as
described above. In addition, you must select the port(s) through which the
unit searches for and communicates with the DHCP server, as described in
section “Access to DHCP” on page 130.
The default is Disable.
4.2.6.1.4.2 Access to DHCP

The Access to DHCP option enables defining the port through which the unit
searches for and communicates with a DHCP server. Select from the following
options:
From Wireless Link Only
From Ethernet Only
From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link

The default for Access Units is From Ethernet Only. The default for Subscriber
Units is From Wireless Link Only.
4.2.6.1.5 Show IP Parameters

The Show IP Parameters option displays the current values of the IP parameters,
including the Run Time IP Address, Run Time Subnet Mask and Run Time
Default Gateway Address.
4.2.6.2 Air Interface Parameters

The Air Interface Parameters menu enables viewing the current Air Interface
parameters defined for the unit and configuring new values for each of the
relevant parameters.
4.2.6.2.1 Country Code and Sub-Bands

Each country has its own regulations regarding operation modes and parameters
such as allowable frequencies and bandwidth, the need to employ an automatic
mechanism for detection and avoidance of frequencies used by radar systems,
maximum transmit power at each of the supported modulation levels and the
ability to use burst transmissions. To efficiently manage these country dependent
parameters, each unit has a 'Country Code' parameter and a set of accompanying
parameters, which depend on this country code. Where more than one set of
parameters can be used, the available sets are defined as Sub-Bands, selectable
through the Frequency configuration menu.
4.2.6.2.2 ESSID Parameters

The ESSID (Extended Service Set ID) is a string used to identify a wireless network
and to prevent the unintentional merging of two wireless networks or two sectors
in the same network. Typically, a different ESSID is defined for each AU. To
facilitate easy addition of SUs to an existing network without a prior knowledge of
which specific AU will serve it, and to support the Best AU feature, a secondary
"global" ESSID, namely "Operator ESSID", can be configured in the AU. If the
Operator ESSID Option is enabled at the AU, the Beacon frames transmitted by it
will include both the ESSID and Operator ESSID. The SU shall regard such
frames if either the ESSID or the Operator ESSID matches it own ESSID. The
ESSID of the AU with which the SU is eventually associated is defined as the
Run-Time ESSID of the SU. Typically, the initial ESSID of the SU is configured to
the value of the Operator ESSID. When the SU has become associated with a
specific AU, its ESSID can be reconfigured to the value of the ESSID of the AU.
To support increased security the ESSID may be hidden. When this feature is
activated in AU it will not broadcast the ESSID in Beacon frames (null characters
will be transmitted instead of the ESSID). The ESSID will not be transmitted also
in Distance messages transmitted by either the AU or the associated SUs.

The following frames will still contain the ESSID:
Probe Request - generated by SUs when active scanning is used.
Probe Response -generated by the AU as a response when the AU receives a

Probe Request from an SU. This unicast frame is sent only to the SU that has
sent the Probe Request, and it is sent only if the ESSID received in the Probe
Request is the same as the AU's ESSID.
The ESSID will be present also in the Association Request frame sent by SUs.
The impact of the Hidden ESSID feature on the SU's operation is as follows:
If the Hidden ESSID Support parameter in the SU is set to Disable, the SU will
not try to Associate with an AU that is working with Hidden ESSID Enabled
If the Hidden ESSID Support parameter in the SU is set to Enable the SU will
try to Associate with an AU that is working with Hidden ESSID. The SU will
send the Association Request that will contain the ESSID of the SU; the AU
will check the SU's ESSID versus its own ESSID and if there is a match the AU
will associate the SU. If the SU uses a different ESSID the AU will reject it and
the Association Response will include the reason for rejection. The SU will add
this AU to a table that contains the AUs that rejected it because of wrong
ESSID and it will not try again to associate with this AU until the Hidden
ESSID Timeout expires.
If Hidden ESSID Support parameter in the SU is set to Enable and the SU

finds an AU that is not working with Hidden ESSID the SU will try to associate
with this AU only if the AU's ESSID/Operator ESSID is the same as the SU's
ESSID.
The impact of the Hidden ESSID feature on the AU's operation is as follows:
When the AU receives Probe Request form an SU it will check if the ESSID in
the Probe Request is that same as its own ESSID. It will generate the Probe
Response only if there is a match.
The Authentication process is not affected by the Hidden ESSID feature.
When the AU receives an Association Request and the ESSID included in the
frame matches its own ESSID the AU sends the Association Response with
Status Code OK - meaning that the SU is associated. If there is no match the

AU sends the Association Response with Status code Rejected - meaning that
SU is not associated, and the reason of rejection - wrong ESSID.
An SU that is trying to associate with AUs that are working with Hidden ESSID
will keep a list with AUs that rejected. The AU will be kept in this list until the
Hidden ESSID Timeout expires for it or if the list is full and another AU that is not
in the list rejects the SU because of wrong ESSID.
The AU that is working with Hidden ESSID enable will keep a counter that will be
incremented for each SU that is rejected because of wrong ESSID.
The Operator ESSID feature still works when Hidden ESSID is enabled. The only
differences is that the Runtime ESSID displayed by SU, when the SU is associated
because of Operator ESSID, will be the ESSID of the SU and not the ESSID of the
AU as it is when Hidden ESSID is disabled.
The ESSID related parameters are:
4.2.6.2.2.1 ESSID
The ESSID parameter defines the ESSID of the unit.
The default value is ESSID1.
NOTE
The ESSID string is case sensitive.
4.2.6.2.2.2 Operator ESSID Parameters (AU only)

The Operator ESSID Parameters submenu includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.2.2.2.1 Operator ESSID Option

The Operator ESSID Option enables or disables the use of Operator ESSID for
establishing association with SUs.
The default is Enable.
4.2.6.2.2.2.2 Operator ESSID

The Operator ESSID parameter defines the Operator ESSID.
The default value is ESSID1.

NOTE
The Operator ESSID string is case sensitive.
4.2.6.2.2.3 Hidden ESSID Option (AU only)

The Hidden ESSID Option enables or disables the Hidden ESSID feature. When
enabled, the ESSID will not be broadcasted by the AU.
4.2.6.2.2.4 Hidden ESSID (SU only)

The Hidden ESSID submenu in the SU includes the following options:
4.2.6.2.2.4.1 Hidden ESSID Support

The Hidden ESSID Support option enables or disables the Hidden ESSID feature
in the SU.
4.2.6.2.2.4.2 Hidden ESSID Timeout

The Hidden ESSID Timeout parameter defines the time that SU will not try again
to associate with an AU that is working with Hidden ESSID if the AU rejected
Association Request sent by the SU because of wrong ESSID.
The range is from 1 to 60 minutes.
The default is 10 minutes.
4.2.6.2.2.4.3 Show Hidden ESSID Parameters

Select this option to view the current values of Hidden ESSID Support and Hidden
ESSID Timeout.
4.2.6.2.3 Frequency Definition Parameters

4.2.6.2.3.1 Sub-Bands and Frequency Selection
Each unit is delivered with one or more pre-configured Sub-Bands, according to
the country code. These sets of parameters include also the frequencies that can
be used and the bandwidth.
The parameters that determine the frequency to be used are set in the AU. If more
than one Sub-Band is available, the sub-band to be used can be selected. If only
one Sub-Band is supported, then the sub-band selection option is not available.
The SU should be configured with a minimal set of parameters to ensure that it
will be able to automatically detect and use the frequency/bandwidth used by the
AU, including possible changes in this frequency (Automatic Sub Band Select
feature).

To simplify the installation process the SU scans a definable frequencies subset

after power-up. The defined frequencies subsets may include frequencies from
more than one Sub-Band, enabling automatic detection of both frequency and
bandwidth. If the Best AU feature is enabled, the SU will scan the defined subset
and the operating frequency/bandwidth will be determined by the Best AU
mechanism (including the optional use of the Preferred AU feature). Otherwise the
SU will try to associate with the first AU it finds. If no AU is found, the SU will
start another scanning cycle.
4.2.6.2.3.2 Avoiding Frequencies with Radar Activity

In some regions, it is important to ensure that wireless access equipment does not
interfere with certain radar systems in the 5 GHz band. If radar is being detected,
the wireless access network should move automatically to a frequency that does
not interfere with the radar system.
The country dependent set of parameters includes also an indication whether DFS
(Dynamic Frequency Selection) should be used. The DFS algorithm is designed to
detect and avoid operation in channels with radar activity. If the current sub-band
does not support DFS, then the DFS parameters configuration submenu is not
available.
When DFS is enabled, the AU monitors the spectrum continuously, searching for
signals with a specific pattern indication radar activity. Upon detecting radar
activity, the AU immediately stops transmitting on this frequency and starts
looking for another radar-free frequency. The subset of viable frequencies is
configurable.
The AU maintains a continuously updated database of all applicable frequencies,

where each frequency is marked as Radar Free, Radar Detected or Adjacent to
Radar. The AU attempts to check a new frequency only if it is marked as Radar
Free. If a radar activity was detected on a certain frequency, it will be marked in
the database as a Radar Detected frequency. The AU will not attempt to check for
radar activity in frequencies marked as Radar Detected. A certain time after
detecting radar activity on a frequency, it will be removed from the list of Radar
Detected frequencies and will be marked as Radar Free. If radar activity was
detected on a certain frequency, adjacent channels should not be used as well,
according to the bandwidth. For instance, if the bandwidth is 20 MHz, then if
radar activity was detected in 5800 MHz, frequencies 5790 MHz and 5810 MHz
should not be used as well. These frequencies are marked in the database as
Adjacent to Radar, and will be treated the same as Radar Detected frequencies.
Before ceasing transmission on the frequency where radar signals had been
detected, the AU sends a special disassociation message to its associated SUs.
This message includes an indication whether the SUs should wait for this AU. If

the SUs should wait, the message includes also the waiting time. During this time
each SU searches for the AU in the defined frequencies subset. If the AU was not
found within the waiting time, or if a waiting request was not included in the
message, the SU starts searching for any AU, using the Best AU mechanism if
applicable.
Typically, operators prefer to preserve the original frequency planning and to

avoid moving to a new channel unless they are sure that there is a continuous
radar activity in the original channel. It should be noted that detection of radar
activity does not necessarily indicate a continuous radar activity in the channel. A
channel reuse algorithm enables returning to the original channel under certain
conditions that indicates low radar activity on the channel.
4.2.6.2.4 Frequency Definition Submenu in AU

The Frequency Definition submenu in AU includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.2.4.1 Sub-Band Select

This parameter is available only if the country code supports two or more
Sub-Bands. For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit
and the supported parameters' values and options, refer to section “Show Country
Dependent Parameters” on page 94.
The range depends on the number of Sub-Bands supported by the country code.
The default selection is Sub-Band 1.
4.2.6.2.4.2 Frequency
The Frequency parameter defines the transmit/receive frequency when DFS is not
enabled. If DFS is enabled, it sets the initial operational frequency upon starting
the DFS mechanism for the first time.
The range depends on the selected Sub-Band.
The default is the lowest frequency in the Sub-Band.
NOTE 1 (Japan 4.9 GHz, 10 MHz Bandwidth):
In BreezeACCESS VL units operating in the 4.9 GHz Japan band (not B&B
point-to-point) with a 10 MHz bandwidth, the following rules must be met for full
compliance with regulations:
not be set to a value above 11 dBm. The Maximum Transmit Power of the SU

not be set to a value above 13 dBm. The Maximum Transmit power of the SU
This requirement, although not indicated in the certification document, is needed

following the tests performed in the certification lab.
For full compliance with FCC regulation of units with HW rev C using a 10 MHz
bandwidth, if you wish to include frequency channel 5265 MHz in the set of
frequencies to be used, then the Transmit Power parameter in the AU, and the
Maximum Tx Power parameter in the SUs, should not be set to a value above
"25-Antenna Gain". If there is a need to use a higher value for these parameters,
this frequency should not be used.
For full compliance with FCC regulations, the following requirements should be
followed in units using a 20 MHz bandwidth:
1 In units HW Revision B, if you wish to include frequency channel 5270 MHz in

the set of frequencies to be used, then the Transmit Power parameter in the
AU, and the Maximum Tx Power parameter in the SUs, should not be set to a
value above "17-Antenna Gain". If there is a need to use a higher value for
these parameters, this frequency should not be used.
2 In units with HW Revision C, if you wish to include one or more of frequency

channels 5270, 5275 and 5330 MHz in the set of frequencies to be used, then
the Transmit Power parameter in the AU, and the Maximum Tx Power
parameter in the SUs, should not be set to a value above "20-Antenna Gain". If
there is a need to use a higher value for these parameters, this frequency
should not be used.
4.2.6.2.4.3 DFS Parameters

The DFS Parameters submenu is available only if DFS is supported by the current
Sub-Band.
Note that starting on SW version 5.2, the DFS feature is supported (although
disabled by default) for units using Country Codes 1060 and 1064 (Universal 5.4
GHz and Universal 5.8 GHz). When a unit using either one of these Country Codes
is upgraded from a SW version lower than 5.2 the feature will not be automatically
applicable. If the user wants to use the DFS feature he must re-apply the Country
Code values (see section “Re-apply Country Code Values” on page 211). Note also
that for these units, if the user changes the working sub-band the DFS Option will

be automatically be set to No. For other Country Codes that support DFS when
sub-band is changed the DFS Option is forced to Yes.
The DFS Parameters submenu includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.2.4.3.1 DFS Required by Regulations

The DFS Required by Regulations option enables defining whether DFS should be
used for compliance with applicable local regulations. The options are Yes or No.
Selection of the No option will disable the radar detection and dynamic frequency
selection mechanism.
The default depends on the Country Code (No for Universal Country Codes in the
5.4 and 5.8 GHz bands, Yes for all other Country Codes that support DFS as
required by applicable regulations).
4.2.6.2.4.3.2 Frequency Subset Definition

The Frequency Subset Definition parameter defines the frequencies that will be
used in the DFS mechanism. The available frequencies according to the Sub-Band
are displayed, and each of the frequencies in the list is associated with an index.
The frequencies subset can be defined by entering the indexes of the required
frequencies, or "A" to select all available frequencies.
The default is the complete list of frequencies available in the Sub-Band.
4.2.6.2.4.3.3 Channel Check Time

The Channel Check Time defines the time allocated for checking whether there is
a radar activity on a new frequency after power up or after attempting to move to a
new frequency upon detecting radar activity on the previously used frequency.
During this time the AU does not transmit.
The range is 1 to 3600 seconds.
The default is 60 seconds.
4.2.6.2.4.3.4 Channel Avoidance Period

The Channel Avoidance Period defines the time that the frequency will remain
marked in the database as Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar after detecting
radar activity. These frequencies will not be used when searching for a new
frequency. When this time has elapsed, the unit frequency's marking will change
to Radar Free.
The range is 1 to 60 minutes.

4.2.6.2.4.3.5 SU Waiting Option

The SU Waiting Option defines whether the disassociation message sent by the
AU, after detecting radar activity on the current frequency, will include a message
instructing the SU to search only for the AU before attempting to search for
another AU. The message includes also the time period during which the SU
should not search for any other AU. The waiting time is the Channel Check Time
plus 5 seconds.
4.2.6.2.4.3.6 Minimum Pulses to Detect

The Minimum Pulses to Detect parameter defines the minimum number of radar
pulses that should be detected before reaching a decision that radar is active on
the channel.
The range is from 1 to 100 pulses.
The default is 4 pulses for FCC Country Codes, 8 for other (ETSI) Country Codes.
4.2.6.2.4.3.7 Channel Reuse Parameters (DFS+)

The Channel Reuse algorithm enables returning to the original channel under
certain conditions that indicate low radar activity on the original channel. The
conditions are that radar was detected in this channel not more than N times
(Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period) during the last T hours
(Radar Activity Assessment Period). When the Channel Reuse Option is enabled,
then by the end of the Channel Avoidance Period the unit will attempt returning to
the original frequency, provided these conditions are met.
The Channel Reuse Parameters submenu includes the following options:
Channel Reuse Option: Enabling/disabling the Channel Reuse algorithm.
Radar Activity Assessment Period: The period in hours used for assessment
of radar activity in the original channel.
The range is 1 to 12 hours.
The default is 5 hours.
Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period: The maximum

number of radar detections in the original channel during the Radar Activity
Assessment Period that is required for reaching a decision to try again the
original channel.

The range is 1 to 10 radar detections.
The default is 5 radar detections.
4.2.6.2.4.3.8 DFS Detection Algorithm

The DFS Detection Algorithm option is applicable only to units using a Universal
Country Code in either the 5.4 GHz or the 5.8 GHz band (Country Codes 1060
and 1064), enabling to select the DFS detection algorithm if DFS should be
enabled.
The available options are ETSI and FCC.
The default is ETSI.
4.2.6.2.4.3.9 Clear Radar Detected Channels after Reset

When the Clear Radar Detected Channels after Reset is enabled, after the next
reset all viable frequencies will be marked in the database as Radar Free,
including frequencies previously marked as either Radar Detected or Adjacent to
Radar. In addition, the AU will start operation using its default frequency.
4.2.6.2.4.3.10Show DFS Settings And Data

Upon selecting the Show DFS Settings and Data, the values of all DFS parameters
and the current operating frequency will be displayed. The current defined
frequency subset as well as the defined subset (to be used after the next reset) are
also displayed. In addition, all the applicable frequencies will be displayed
together with their status in the database (Radar Free, Radar Detected or Adjacent
to Radar).
4.2.6.2.4.4 Country Code Learning by SU

This feature support simplified installation and updates processes by enabling the
SU to adapt the Country Code used by the AU.
The AU advertises its country code in every beacon and association response
message. Upon synchronization the SU will check if its country code and the
country code received from the AU are the same. If they are not the same and the
Country Code Learning by SU is enabled, the SU will use the AU's country code:
the country code derived limitations will be forced and the following parameters
will be set according to new country definitions:
Maximum TX Power will be set to the maximum defined by the country code.
TX Power will be set to the maximum defined by the country code.

The Modulation Level will be set to the maximum modulation level defined by
the country code.
The Multicast Modulation Level will be set to the minimum modulation level
defined by the country code.
The Burst Mode will be set to enable if the country code supports burst mode,
and the burst duration will be set to default.
The SU will learn a new Country Code only if it is running from the Main version.
After country code learning (adaptation) the unit is automatically reset.
NOTE
The Country Code Learning by SU feature does not function with the default ESSID (ESSID1).
4.2.6.2.4.5 Show Frequency definitions

Upon selecting Show Frequency Definitions, the selected Sub-Band and
Frequency are displayed. In addition, all the parameters displayed upon selecting
Show DFS Settings and Data are also displayed.
4.2.6.2.5 Frequency Definition Submenu in SU

4.2.6.2.5.1 Sub-Band Select
This parameter is available only if the country code supports two or more
Sub-Bands. The Sub-Band Select option in the SU enables defining the sub band
to be used during Spectrum Analysis (see “Spectrum Analysis” on page 154). It
has no affect on the frequencies to be used during regular operation, which are
defined using the User Defined Frequency Subsets menu described below. For
information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and the
supported parameters' values and options, refer to section “Show Country
The range depends on the number of Sub-Bands supported by the country code.
The default selection is Sub-Band 1.
4.2.6.2.5.2 User Defined Frequency Subsets

The User Defined Frequency Subsets menu enables defining for each of the
available Sub-Bands the frequencies that will be used by the SU when scanning
for an AU. For each available Sub-Band, the available frequencies are displayed,
and an index is associated with each frequency. Enter either the desired

frequency indexes, 'A' (All) for using all frequencies in the subset or 'N' (None) for
not scanning that sub-band.
The default is all frequencies in all available sub-bands.
4.2.6.2.5.3 Show Frequency Definitions

Upon selecting the Show Frequency Definitions, the selected frequencies in the
available Sub-Bands and the current operating frequency are displayed.
4.2.6.2.6 Best AU Parameters (SU)

An SU that can communicate with more than one AU using the same ESSID may
become associated with the first AU it "finds", not necessarily the best choice in
terms of quality of communication. The same limitation also exists if only one AU
in the neighborhood has an ESSID identical to the one used by the SU, as it is not
always necessarily the best choice.
The topology of a fixed access network is constantly changing. Changes in base

station deployment and subscriber density can accumulate to create substantial
changes in SU performance. The quest for load sharing together with the desire to
create best throughput conditions for the SU created the need for the Best AU
feature, to enable an SU to connect to the best AU in its neighborhood.
When the Best AU feature is used, each of the AUs is given a quality mark based
on the level at which it is received by the SU. The SU scans for a configured
number of cycles, gathering information from all the AUs with which it can
communicate. At the end of the scanning period, the SU reaches a Best AU
decision according to the information gathered. The AU with the highest quality
mark is selected as the Best AU, and the SU will immediately try to associate with
it. The quality mark given to each AU depends on the level at which it is received
by the SU.
The Best AU selection mechanism can be overridden by defining a specific AU as

the preferred AU.
NOTE
Although the SU selects the Best AU based on long-term conditions prior to the decision time, it
may not always be connected to the instantaneous Best AU at any given time. Note also that the
decision is made only once during the scanning interval. The decision may not remain the optimal
one for ever. If there are significant changes in deployment of neighboring AUs and the SUs served
by them, overall performance may be improved if the applicable SUs are reset intentionally so as to
re-initiate the Best AU decision process.
The Best AU Parameters menu includes the following options:
4.2.6.2.6.1 Best AU Support

The Best AU Support option enables or disables the Best AU selection feature.

NOTE
If the Best AU feature is not used, the SU associates with the first AU it finds whose ESSID or
Operator ESSID is identical to its own ESSID.
4.2.6.2.6.2 Number Of Scanning Attempts

When the Best AU option is enabled, the SU gathers information on neighboring
AUs for approximately 2 seconds on each of the scanned frequencies. The Number
of Scanning Attempts parameter defines the number of times that the process will
be repeated for all relevant frequencies. A higher number may result in a better
decision at the cost of an increased scanning time during which the SU is not
operational.
Valid values: 1 - 255.
Default value: 4.
4.2.6.2.6.3 Preferred AU MAC Address

The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter defines a specific AU with which the SU
should associate. Gaining control of the SUs association is a powerful tool in
network management. The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter is intended for
applications where there is a need to dictate the preferred AU with which the SU
should associate. To prevent the SU from associating with the first viable AU it
finds, the Best AU Support mechanism should be enabled. Once the SU has
identified the preferred AU based on its MAC address, it will associate with it and
terminate the scanning process. If the preferred AU is not found, the SU will
associate with an AU according to the decision reached using the best AU
algorithm.
Valid values: A MAC address string.
The default value for the Preferred AU MAC Address is 00-00-00-00-00-00 (12
zeros), meaning that there is no preferred AU.
4.2.6.2.6.4 Show Best AU Parameters and Data

The Show Best AU Parameters and Data option displays the applicable
information:
The Neighboring AU Data table displays the following details for each AU with
which the unit can communicate:
MAC Address
SNR of the received signal

RSSI of the received signal
Mark - The computed quality mark for the AU.
Full - The association load status of the AU. It is defined as full if the number
of SUs associated with the AU has reached the maximum allowed according to
the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter. An AU whose
associations load status is full cannot be selected as the Best AU, even if its
computed mark is the highest.
ESSID - The ESSID of the AU.
In addition to the neighboring AU data table, the following information is

displayed:
Best AU Support
Preferred AU MAC Address
Number of Scanning Attempts
Associated AU MAC Address (the MAC address of the selected AU)
4.2.6.2.7 Scanning Mode (SU only)

The Scanning Mode parameter defines whether the SU will use Passive or Active
scanning when searching for an AU.
In passive scanning, the SU "listens" to the wireless medium for approximately

two seconds at each frequency, searching for beacons. The disassociation period,
which is the time from the moment the link was lost until the SU decides that it
should start searching for another AU, is approximately seven seconds.
In some situations when there is a high probability that SUs might need to roam
among different AUs, the use of active scanning enables to significantly reduce the
link establishment time. This is achieved by using shorter dwell periods,
transmitting a Probe Request at each frequency. This reduces the time spent at
each frequency as well as the disassociation period.
When DFS is supported by the Country Code being used by the SU, Scanning
Mode is forced to Passive.
The default selection is Passive.

4.2.6.2.8 Power Control Parameters

The Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) algorithm simplifies the
installation process and ensures optimal performance while minimizing
interference to other units. This is achieved by automatically adjusting the power
level transmitted by each SU according to the actual level at which it is received
by the AU. To support proper operation of the system with optimal performance
and minimum interference between neighboring sectors, the ATPC algorithm
should be enabled in all units.
The algorithm is controlled by the AU that calculates for each received frame the
average SNR at which it receives transmissions from the specific SU. The average
calculation takes into account the previous calculated average, thus reducing the
effect of short temporary changes in link conditions. The weight of history (the
previous value) in the formula used for calculating the average SNR is determined
by a configurable parameter. In addition, the higher the time that has passed
since the last calculation, the lower the impact of history on the calculated
average. If the average SNR is not in the configured target range, the AU transmits
to the SU a power-up or a power-down message. The target is that each SU will be
received at an optimal level, or as high (or low) as possible if the optimal range
cannot be reached because of specific link conditions.
Each time that the SU tries to associate with the AU (following either a reset or
loss of synchronization), it will initiate transmissions using its Transmit Power
parameters. If after a certain time the SU does not succeed to synchronize with
the AU, it will start increasing the transmit power level.
In an AU the maximum supported transmit power is typically used to provide

maximum coverage. However, there may be a need to decrease the transmitted
power level in order to support relatively small cells and to minimize the
interference with the operation of neighboring cells, or for compliance with local
regulatory requirements.
In some cases the maximum transmit power of the SU should be limited to ensure
compliance with applicable regulations or for other reasons.
Different power levels may be used for different modulation levels by taking into
account possible HW limitations or regulatory restrictions.
4.2.6.2.8.1 Transmit Power

The Transmit Power submenu includes the following options:
Transmit Power
Show Transmit Power Parameters

4.2.6.2.8.1.1 Transmit Power

In the AU, the Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power level
and is not part of the ATPC algorithm.
In the SU, the Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power level
when the ATPC algorithm is disabled. If the ATPC Option is enabled, the value
configured for this parameter serves for setting the initial value to be used by the
ATPC algorithm after either power up or losing synchronization with the AU.
The minimum value for the Transmit Power Parameter is 10 dBm (the ATPC may
reduce the actual transmit power of the SU to lower values). The maximum value
of the Transmit Power Parameter depends on several unit properties and
parameters:
The HW revision of the unit
The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub-Band.
The Maximum EIRP as defined for the applicable Sub-Band, together with the
value of the Antenna Gain. In certain countries the Maximum EIRP of some
equipment types cannot exceed a certain value. In these cases the Transmit
Power cannot exceed the value of (Maximum EIRP - Antenna Gain).
Maximum Tx Power parameter (in SU only)
For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and the
The unit calculates the maximum allowed Transmit Power according to the unit
properties and parameters listed above, and displays the allowed range when a
Transmit Power parameter is selected.
For each modulation level, the unit will use as transmit power the minimum
between this parameter and the maximum Tx power allowed by the HW and the
Country Code for the specific modulation level.
The default Transmit Power is the highest allowed value.
4.2.6.2.8.1.2 Show Transmit Power Parameters

This option displays the Transmit Power parameter and the current transmit
power for the different modulation levels.
4.2.6.2.8.2 Maximum Transmit Power (SU only)

The Maximum Transmit Power submenu includes the following options:

Maximum Tx Power
Show Maximum Tx Power Parameters
4.2.6.2.8.2.1 Maximum Tx Power

The Maximum Tx Power parameter limits the maximum transmit power that can
be reached by the ATPC algorithm. It also sets the upper limits for the Transmit
Power parameters.
The minimum value for the Maximum Tx Power is -10 dBm. The maximum value
depends on several unit properties and parameters:
The HW revision of the unit
The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub-Band.
The Maximum EIRP as defined for the applicable Sub-Band, together with the
value of the Antenna Gain. In certain countries the Maximum EIRP of some
equipment types cannot exceed a certain value. In these cases the Transmit
Power cannot exceed the value of (Maximum EIRP - Antenna Gain).
For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and the
The unit calculates the maximum allowed Maximum Tx Power according to the
unit properties and parameters listed above, and displays the allowed range when
the Maximum Tx Power parameter is selected.
For each modulation level, the unit will use as maximum transmit power the
minimum between this parameter and the maximum Tx power allowed by the HW
and the Country Code for the specific modulation level.
The default Maximum Tx Power is the highest allowed value.
4.2.6.2.8.2.2 Show Maximum Tx Power Parameters

This option displays the Maximum Tx Power parameter and the current maximum
Tx power for the different modulation levels.
4.2.6.2.8.3 ATPC Parameters in AU

4.2.6.2.8.3.1 ATPC Option
The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control
(ATPC) algorithm.

4.2.6.2.8.3.2 ATPC Option for EZ

The ATPC Option for EZ enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power
Control algorithm when connecting to SU-EZ units in order to avoid saturation in
the AU’s receive circuits and prevent interference between two adjacent sectors.
Default value: Disable
NOTE
The ATPC Option for EZ functionality will only work for a particular AU-VL/SU-EZ pair only if both
units use the same Management VLAN ID.
4.2.6.2.8.3.3 ATPC Minimum SNR Level

The Minimum SNR Level defines the lowest SNR at which you want each SU to be
received at the AU (the lower limit of the optimal reception level range).
Available values: 4 to 60 (dB).
Default value: 28 (dB).
4.2.6.2.8.3.4 ATPC Delta from Minimum SNR Level

The Delta from Minimum SNR Level is used to define the highest SNR at which
you want each SU to be received at the AU (the higher limit of the optimal
reception level range):
Max. Level=Minimum SNR Level + Delta from Minimum SNR Level.
Available values: 4 to 20 (dB).
Default value: 5 (dB) for units operating in the 5.4 and 5.8 GHz bands. 8 (dB) for
units operating in the 4.9, 5.2 and 5.3 GHz bands.
4.2.6.2.8.3.5 Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages

The Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages parameter sets the minimal time
between consecutive power-up/power-down messages to a specific SU. Setting a
low value for this parameter may lead to higher overhead and to an excessive rate
of power level changes at the SUs. High values for this parameter increase the
time it will take the SUs to reach optimal transmit power level.
Available values: 1 to 3600 seconds.
Default value: 30 seconds.
4.2.6.2.8.3.6 ATPC Power Level Step

The ATPC Power Level Step parameter defines the step size to be used by the SUs
for incrementing/decrementing the Current Transmit Power after receiving a
power-up/power-down message. If the distance between the value of the Current

Transmit Power and the desired range is smaller than the step size, the
power-up/power-down message will include the specific step value required for
this condition.
Valid range: 1-20 (dB)
Default value: 5 (dB)
4.2.6.2.8.4 ATPC Parameters in SU

4.2.6.2.8.4.1 ATPC Option
The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control
(ATPC) algorithm. The parameter takes effect immediately. However, when
changed from Enable to Disable, the transmit power level will remain at the last
Current Transmit Power determined by the ATPC algorithm before it was disabled.
It will change to the value configured for the Initial Transmit Power parameter
only after the next reset or following loss of synchronization.
NOTE
The accuracy of the Transmit Power level is typically +/- 1 dB. However, at levels that are 15 dB or
more below the maximum supported by the hardware, the accuracy is +/- 3 dB (for information on
hardware limitations refer to the Country Codes document). At these levels the use of ATPC may
cause significant fluctuations in the power level of the transmitted signal. When operating at such
low levels, it is recommended to disable the ATPC Option and to set the Transmit Power parameter
to the average Tx Power level before the ATPC was disabled.
4.2.6.2.8.5 Tx Control (AU only)

The Tx Control option enables turning Off/On the AU's transmitter, or having the
AU Tx status controlled by the status of the Ethernet port/link.
If the selected option is Ethernet Status Control, then:
If the Ethernet link is down, the AU transmitter will be switched to Off.
If the Ethernet link is up, the AU transmitter will be switched to On.
This feature can be used during maintenance or testing to avoid transmissions

using undesired parameters.
The parameter is available only when managing the unit from its Ethernet port.
The default is On

4.2.6.2.9 Antenna Gain

The Antenna Gain parameter enables to define the net gain of a detached
antenna. The configured gain should take into account the attenuation of the
cable connecting the antenna to the unit. The Antenna Gain is important
especially in countries where there is a limit on the EIRP allowed for the unit; the
maximum allowed value for the Transmit Power parameters cannot exceed the
value of (EIRP - Antenna Gain), where the EIRP is defined in the selected
Sub-Band.
In certain units with an integral antenna the Antenna Gain is not available as a
configurable parameter. However, it is available as a read-only parameter in the
applicable "Show" menus.
The lower limit for the Antenna Gain parameter is 0 (dBi). The upper limit for the
Antenna Gain is Regulation Max EIRP + 10 in dBi (since the minimum Tx Power is
-10dBm), up to a maximum of 50 (dBi). If Regulation Max EIRP is No Limit, the
upper limit is 50 (dBi). A value of "Don't Care" means that the actual value is not
important. A value of "Not Set Yet" means that the unit will not transmit until the
actual value (in the range 0 to 50) is configured. The unit can be configured to
"Don't Care" or "Not Set Yet" only in factory (when upgraded to SW version 2.0
from a lower version it will be set automatically to one of these options). Once a
value is configured, it is not possible to reconfigure the unit to either "Don't Care"
or "Not Set Yet".
The default value depends on unit type. In SUs with integral antenna it is set to
21 (read only). The default value for AUs that are supplied with a detached
antenna is in accordance with the antenna's gain. In units supplied without an
antenna the default is typically "Not Set Yet".
4.2.6.2.10 Cell Distance Parameters (AU only)

The higher the distance of an SU from the AU that is serving it, the higher the time
it takes for messages sent by one of them to reach the other. To ensure
appropriate services to all SUs regardless of their distance from the AU while
maintaining a high overall performance level, two parameters should be adapted
to the distances of SUs from the serving AU:
The time that a unit waits for a response message before retransmission (ACK
timeout) should take into account the round trip propagation delay between
the AU and the SU (The one-way propagation delay at 5 GHz is 3.3
microseconds per km/5 microseconds per mile.). The higher the distance from
the AU of the SU served by it, the higher the ACK timeout should be.
The ACK timeout in microseconds is: 20+Distance (km)*2*3.3 or 20+Distance

(miles)*2*5.

To ensure fairness in the contention back-off algorithm between SUs located at

different distances from the AU, the size of the time slot should also take into
account the one-way propagation delay. The size of the time slot of all units in
the cell should be proportional to the distance from the AU of the farthest SU
served by it.
The Cell Distance Mode parameter in the AU defines the method of computing
distances. When set to Manual, the Maximum Cell Distance parameter should be
configured with the estimated distance of the farthest SU served by the AU. When
set to Automatic, the AU uses a special algorithm to estimate its distance from
each of the SUs it serves, determine which SU is located the farthest and use the
estimated distance of the farthest SU as the maximum cell distance. The value of
the maximum cell distance parameter (either computed or configured manually) is
transmitted in the beacon messages to all SUs served by the AU, and is used by
all units to calculate the size of the time slot, that must be the same for all units
in the same sector. When the Per SU Distance Learning option is enabled, the AU
uses the re association message to send to each SU its estimated distance from
the AU. The per-SU distance is used to calculate the ACK timeout to be used by
the SU. When the Per SU Distance Learning option is disabled (or if it cannot be
used because the SU uses a previous SW version that does not support this
feature), the SU will use the maximum cell distance to calculate the ACK timeout.
The AU always uses the maximum cell distance to calculate the ACK timeout.
It should be noted that if the size of the time slot used by all units is adapted to
the distance of the farthest unit, then no unit will have an advantage when
competing for services. However, this reduces the overall achievable throughput of
the cell. In certain situations, the operator may decide to improve the overall
throughput by reducing the slot size below the value required for full fairness
(using the Fairness Factor parameter). This means that when there is competition
for bandwidth, the back-off algorithm will give an advantage to SUs that are
located closer to the AU.
The Cell Distance Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.2.10.1 Cell Distance Mode

The Cell Distance Mode option defines whether the maximum distance of the AU
from any of the SUs it serves will be determined manually (using the Maximum
Cell Distance parameter) or automatically. In addition, the Per SU Distance
Learning feature is supported only when the Cell Distance Mode is set to
Automatic.
The Options are Automatic or Manual.
The default is Automatic.

4.2.6.2.10.2 Maximum Cell Distance

The Maximum Cell Distance parameter allows configuring the maximum distance
when the Cell Distance Mode option is Manual.
The range is 0 to 54 (Km). The value of 0 has a special meaning for No

Compensation: Acknowledge Time Out is set to a value representing the
maximum distance of 54 km. The time slot size is set to its minimal value of 9
microseconds.
The default is 0 (No Compensation).
4.2.6.2.10.3 Fairness Factor

The Fairness Factor enables to define the level of fairness in providing services to
different SUs. When set to 100%, all SUs have the same probability of getting
services when competing for bandwidth. If set to X%, then SUs located up to X%
of the maximum distance from the AU will have an advantage in getting services
over SUs located farther than this distance.
The range is 0 to 100 (%).
The default is 100 (%).
4.2.6.2.10.4 Per SU Distance Learning

The Per SU Distance Learning option defines the mode in which SUs calculate the
ACK timeout: based on the maximum cell distance or on the actual distance from
the AU.
When this feature is disabled, all SUs in the cell use for the calculation of the ACK
timeout the maximum cell distance; when enabled, each SU uses instead its
actual distance from the AU.
The options are Disable or Enable.
4.2.6.2.10.5 Show Cell Distance Parameters

Select Show Cell Distance Parameters to view the Cell Distance parameters. In
addition, the Measured Maximum Cell Distance and the MAC address of the unit
that the mechanism found to be the farthest from the AU are displayed.
4.2.6.2.11 Arbitration Inter-Frame Spacing (AIFS)

The time interval between two consecutive transmissions of frames is called
Inter-Frame Spacing (IFS). This is the time during which the unit determines
whether the medium is idle using the carrier sense mechanism. The IFS depends
on the type of the next frame to be transmitted, as follows:

SIFS (Short Inter-Frame Spacing) is used for certain frames that should be
transmitted immediately, such as ACK and CTS frames. The value of SIFS is
16 microseconds.
DIFS (Distributed coordination function Inter-Frame Spacing) is typically used

for other frame types when the medium is free. If the unit decides that the
medium is not free, it will defer transmission by DIFS plus a number of time
slots as determined by the Contention Window back-off algorithm (see section
“Minimum Contention Window” on page 185) after reaching a decision that the
medium has become free.
DIFS equal SIFS plus AIFS, where AIFS can be configured to a value from 1 to 50
time slots. A unit with a lower AIFS has an advantage over units with a higher
AIFS, since it has a better chance to gain access to limited wireless link resources.
Typically, AIFS should be configured to two time slots. A value of 1 should only be
used in one of the two units in a point-to-point link, where in the other unit the
AIFS remains configured to two time slots. This ensures that the unit with AIFS
configured to one has an advantage over the other unit, provided that the
Minimum Contention Window (section “Minimum Contention Window” on
page 185) parameter in both units is configured to 0 to disable the contention
window back-off algorithm.
NOTE
The AIFS parameter is not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled.
The available range is from 1 to 50 (time slots).
The default is 2 time slots.
CAUTION
An AIFS value of 1 should only be used in point-to-point applications (when the Wireless Link
Prioritization Option is enabled). Otherwise the default value of 2 must always be used. In a
point-to-point link, only one unit should be configured to an AIFS value of 1. When both units need
to transmit, the unit with an AIFS value of 1 will have an advantage over the unit with AIFS of 2. In
this case, the Minimum Contention Window parameter in both units must be configured to 0 to
disable the contention window back-off algorithm.
4.2.6.2.12 Maximum Number of Associations (AU only)

The Maximum Number of Associations parameter defines the maximum number
of Subscriber Units that can be associated with the selected AU, while still
guaranteeing the required quality of service to customers.

Available values for AU-BS and AU-SA range from 0 to 512. For AUS-BS and
AUS-SA the range is from 0 to 8.
Default value for AU-BS and AU-SA is 512. For AUS-BS and AUS-SA the default is
8.
NOTE
The Maximum Number of Associations must be set to a value of 124 or lower to enable Data
Encryption. As long as Data Encryption is enabled, the Maximum Number of Associations cannot
be set to a value higher than 124.
The Maximum Number of Associations Limit (512 when Data Encryption is disabled, 124 when Data
Encryption is enabled) is indicated in the Show Air Interface Parameters display.
NOTE
There is no aging time for SUs. An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the
following conditions:
Therefore, the database of associated SUs may include units no longer associated with the AU. If
the number of associated SUs has reached the value of the Maximum Number of Associations
parameter, the selected AU cannot serve additional SUs. To view the current number of associated
SUs, use the Display Association Info option in the MAC Address Database menu. To delete
inactive SUs from the database you must either disassociate them (see “Disassociate (AU
only)” on page 157) or reset the AU.
4.2.6.2.13 Wireless Link Trap Threshold (AU only)

The Wireless Link Trap Threshold parameter defines the threshold for the wireless
quality trap, indicating that the quality of the wireless link has dropped below (on
trap) or has increased above (off trap) the specified threshold.
The Wireless Link Trap Threshold is in percentage of retransmissions, and the

allowed range is from 1 to 100 (%).
The default is 30 (%).
4.2.6.2.14 Spectrum Analysis

Gaining knowledge of the noise characteristics per channel enables construction
of a relatively noise free working environment. In order to gain information
regarding noise characteristics in the location of the unit, the unit will enter

passive scanning mode for a definite period, during which information will be
gathered. The scanned channels will be all the frequencies included in the
selected sub-band.
Upon activating the spectrum analysis the unit will automatically reset. During
the information-gathering period the unit will not receive nor transmit data. It also
will not be able to synchronize/associate, meaning that it cannot be managed via
the wireless link. During the spectrum analysis period the unit security mode is
changed to promiscuous to enable gathering information regarding all legal
frames received by the unit. At the end of the period the unit will reset
automatically regaining normal operability upon start up.
The Spectrum Analysis submenu includes the following options:
4.2.6.2.14.1 Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period

The Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period is the period of staying on each
channel during each cycle for information gathering when performing spectrum
analysis.
Range: 2-30 seconds.
Default value: 5 seconds.
4.2.6.2.14.2 Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycles

The Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycle is the number of scanning cycles when
performing Spectrum Analysis.
Range: 1-100 cycles.
Default value: 2 cycles.
4.2.6.2.14.3 Automatic Channel Selection (AU only)

The Automatic Channel selection option defines weather the AU will choose the
best noise free channel upon startup after completion of the spectrum analysis
process. The selection is per analysis: when the analysis is completed it will be
disabled automatically.
4.2.6.2.14.4 Spectrum Analysis Activation

The Spectrum analysis Activation option enables activation of the spectrum
analysis process. Upon activation, the unit will reset automatically and start-up in
spectrum analysis mode.
4.2.6.2.14.5 Reset Spectrum Analysis Information

The Reset Spectrum Analysis Information option enables resetting the spectrum
analysis counters.

4.2.6.2.14.6 Spectrum Analysis Information Display

The Spectrum Analysis Information Display option enables viewing the results of
the last analysis process. The displayed information includes the following details
for each channel:
Frequency in MHz
Signal Count: The number of signals (excluding OFDM frames with the
correct bandwidth) in the channel.
Signal SNR: The average SNR of signals (excluding OFDM frames with the
correct bandwidth) in the channel.
Signal Max SNR: The maximum SNR of signals (excluding OFDM frames with
the correct bandwidth) in the channel.
Signal Width: The average width in microseconds of signals (excluding OFDM

frames with the correct bandwidth) in the channel.
OFDM Frames: The number of OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth
detected in the channel.
OFDM SNR: The average SNR (in dB) of OFDM frames received in the channel.
OFDM Max SNR: The maximum SNR (in dB) of OFDM frames received in the
channel.
Noise Floor Avg: The average Noise Floor (in dBm) calculated for the channel.
Noise Floor Max: The maximum Noise Floor (in dBm) calculated for the
channel.
4.2.6.2.14.7 Spectrum Analysis Information Display - Continuous

The Spectrum Analysis Information Display - Continuous option is available only
when the analysis process is active. It enables viewing the continuously updated
results of the current analysis process. The displayed information includes the
same details available for a regular Spectrum Analysis Information Display
option.
4.2.6.2.14.8 Show Spectrum analysis Parameters & Data

The Show Spectrum analysis Parameters & Data option enables viewing the
Spectrum analysis test parameters and the last test results.

4.2.6.2.15 Lost Beacons Transmission Watchdog Threshold (AU only)

When it is unable to send beacon frames for a predetermined period of time, such
as in the case of interferences, the AU resets itself. The Lost Beacons
Transmission Threshold parameter represents the number of consecutive lost
beacons after which the unit will reset itself.
The range for this parameter is 100 - 1000 or 0. When the parameter is set to 0,
this feature is disabled, i.e. internal refresh will never be performed.
The default value is 218.
4.2.6.2.16 Disassociate (AU only)

The Disassociate feature enables disassociating all SUs associated with the AU or
a selected SU. This feature is useful during configuration changes, enabling to
force the SU(s) to re-initiate the association process, including the search for the
best AU (or a preferred AU) using the Best AU process, without performing a full
reset.
The Disassociate submenu includes two options:
Disassociate All SUs
Disassociate SU By MAC Address: to disassociate a selected SU
4.2.6.2.17 Noise Immunity Control

Noise Immunity Control parameters are available only in units with HW Revision
C and higher, except to the Pulse Detection Sensitivity parameter that is available
also in units with HW Revision B.
The Adaptive Noise Immunity (ANI) mechanism is designed to reduce the wireless
physical layer errors and by that enhance the processing power of the unit,
delivering higher packet processing efficiency.
This ANI mechanism is triggered by the rate of detected Physical Errors and it is
modifying different thresholds affecting the immunity to specific interference
types.
This feature, active by default, exists in all units with HW revision C and higher
running SW version 3.0 and higher. Starting in SW version 4.0, the processing
power of the system has been increased dramatically. When using version 4.0 the
units are capable to process more packets per seconds, including physical error
packets. As a result, the ANI mechanism (triggered by the number of received
error packets) may not function properly in certain scenarios, resulting in link
performances that are far below the expectations. The option of manually
controlling the various parameters used by the ANI mechanism enables to achieve

optimal performance in certain deployments where the automatic ANI mechanism

may not function properly.
It is strongly recommended to consult with Alvarion's experts before switching to

manual mode and modifying any of the parameters.
The general rules for using the Noise Immunity Control parameters are:
In the SU, if performance (Modulation Level) is lower than expected based on the
SNR, try switching to Manual mode without changing any of the parameters.
CAUTION
Do not change any of the SU's Noise Immunity Control parameters (except the Noise Immunity
State Control) from remote, as it may result in loss of connectivity to the unit.
In the AU, try switching to Manual mode if overall throughput is too low or if SUs
are lost although communication conditions are sufficient for good connectivity.
In many deployments the transition to Manual mode is sufficient. If not, you may
try changing the Noise Immunity Level and/or Spur Immunity Level parameters.
The target is to reduce the amount of Phy Error rate reported by the unit (see
Total Rx events in section 4.2.5.1.2). To ensure that sensitivity is not reduced too
much and SUs are not lost, verify that the Age (see Display Association Info in
section 4.2.5.4.1) of all SUs is below 20 seconds.
Do not activate the OFDM Weak Signal parameter if the SNR is below 36 dB
(including a 10 dB fading margin). Under normal conditions, the OFDM Weak
Signal should never be activated in the AU, since the SNR of all SUs will be below
36 dB when ATPC is enabled.
The Noise Immunity Control submenu includes the following options:
4.2.6.2.17.1 Noise Immunity State Control

The Noise Immunity State Control defines the activation mode of the Adaptive
Noise Immunity mechanism: Automatic or Manual. The following parameters of
the Noise Immunity Control mechanism are applicable only for Manual mode.
The default is Automatic.
4.2.6.2.17.2 Noise Immunity Level

The Noise Immunity Level parameter sets the threshold for immunity against
broadband interfering signals. A higher value may reduce the number of errors at
the expense of reduced sensitivity.
The range is from 0 to 4. In the current version only 0 and 4 should be used.

The default is 0.
4.2.6.2.17.3 Spur Immunity Level

The Spur Immunity Level parameter sets the threshold for immunity against
narrow band interfering signals such as spurious from signals at other
frequencies. A higher value may reduce the number of errors at the expense of
reduced sensitivity.
The range is from 0 to 7.
The default is 0.
4.2.6.2.17.4 OFDM Weak Signal

The OFDM Week Signal parameter sets the threshold for immunity against
interfering OFDM signals.
The available options are 0 or 1. A value of 1 means that the unit will immediately
reject OFDM packets with a relatively low SNR.
The default is 0.
4.2.6.2.17.5 Pulse Detection Sensitivity

The Pulse Detection Sensitivity parameter affects the Phy error count: If it is set to
Low, than all Phy errors will be reported as regular Phy errors, regardless of the
signal level. If it is set to High, all Phy errors with levels bellow a certain threshold
(not accessible to the user) will be reported as regular Phy errors, while those with
levels higher than the threshold will be reported as detected radar pulses.
When DFS (radar detection) is used or during a Spectrum Analysis test, the Pulse
Detection Sensitivity is set internally to High (regardless of the configured value).
The default is Low.
4.2.6.2.17.6 Show Noise Immunity

Select this option to view the current values of the Noise Immunity Control
parameters, and some additional parameters of the ANI mechanism.
4.2.6.2.18 Noise Floor Calculation Parameters

The Noise Floor calculation mechanism incorporated in the units is used for
estimating the level of the noise floor. This value is used for estimating SNR values
and for decisions on existence of signals in the channel. In some cases, especially
when a very strong signal exists in neighboring channels, the noise floor
calculated by the built-in mechanism may be significantly below the actual noise
floor level.
Typically, the expected noise floor level is:

5 MHz bandwidth: -102 (dBm)
The default calculation mode is Fully Automatic, using only the built-in
mechanism. If you experience problems in the wireless link such as excessively
long association process or very low throughput, it may be caused by errors in
noise floor calculation. In this case, it is recommended to perform a Spectrum
Analysis (see section “Spectrum Analysis” on page 154) and view the Average
Noise Floor values. If the calculated Noise Floor is lower by more than 5 dB from
the expected value, it is recommended to change the calculation mode to
Automatic with Minimum Value, using the expected value as the minimum
(Forced Value).
Note that if the SNR of received signals is very low (typically below 10 dB), it is
recommended to maintain the default calculation mode (Fully Automatic).
Changing the calculation mode to Automatic with Minimum Value may result in
loss of connectivity with units for which the calculated SNR before the change was
relatively low.
The Noise Floor Calculation Parameters submenu includes the following options:
4.2.6.2.18.1 Calculation Mode

The Calculation Mode defines the method used for calculation the Noise Floor
value to be used by the device for estimating the quality of received signals. The
available options are:
Fully Automatic: According to the built-in noise floor calculation mechanism.
Forced: The Noise Floor value is set manually to the value configured for the
Forced Value parameter (see below). Typically this mode should be used only
for special testing purposes.
Automatic with Minimum Value: If the calculated Noise Floor using the
built-in mechanism is higher than the value configured for the Forced Value
parameter, the calculated value will be used. Otherwise, the Forced Value will
be used.
The default option is Fully Automatic.

4.2.6.2.18.2 Forced Value

The Forced Value parameter enables configuring the Noise Floor to be used if the
selected Calculation Mode is Forced. This is also the minimum value to be used if
the selected Calculation Mode is Automatic with Minimum Value.
If you decided to change the calculation mode to Automatic with Minimum Value
and you still experience problems in the link (long association time, exceptionally
low throughput), try to improve it by increasing the configured Forced Value.
The available range is from -107 to -55 (dBm)
The default value is:
4.2.6.2.18.3 Show Noise Floor Calculation

Select this option to view the current values of the Noise Floor Calculation
parameters and the Noise Floor Current Value (the actual current value used by
the device).
4.2.6.2.19 Calibration of Noise Floor Indication

The Calibration of Noise Floor Indication feature has been introduced to overcome
possible inaccuracies in the Noise Floor Calculation mechanism. The calibrated
Noise Floor Indication is used for correcting the displayed Noise Floor values
versus the values that are calculated/used by the internal noise floor calculation
mechanism.
The Calibration of Noise Floor Indication submenu includes the following options:
4.2.6.2.19.1 Run Calibration

Select the Run Calibration option to perform a new calibration process. Typically
this should be performed for a new unit when Factory calibration is not available,
whenever the bandwidth (sub-band) is being changed, or if the previous
calibration process has failed.
Calibration can be performed only under the following conditions:
The Spectrum Analyser is not in progress
There is no active TFTP or FTP session

In an SU, only if the SU is associated
If the calibration has started the unit will reset itself, will perform the calibration
and after that it will reset again and return to normal mode of operation.
The calibration process may take several minutes: 6 seconds for each of the
channels available in the tested sub-band, plus two resets.
If the calibration is running the user will not be able to start a spectrum analysis
or a TFTP/FTP session.
If the calibration failed the results of the previous successful calibration will be
kept. If the calibration passed, the new results will be used for Noise Floor
Indication.
4.2.6.2.19.2 Select Calibration Option to Use

This option enables selection of the calibration option to be used by the device.
The available options are None, Field and Factory.
If Factory option is available, indicating that the unit was calibrated in the factory,
this is the option that should be used.
If Factory option is not available, a Field calibration should be performed (using

the Run Calibration option), and the Field option should be selected.
The None option should be used only if the Field Calibration is repeatedly failing
(see Show Noise Floor Calibration below), or if the RSSI displayed when using the
Field option (following a "successful" Field calibration) is clearly inaccurate,
indicating erroneous results.
The default is None.
4.2.6.2.19.3 Show Noise Floor Calibration

Select this option to view the current status and parameters of Calibration of
Noise Floor Indication. The displayed parameters are:
Field Calibration Status: Indicating whether a Field Calibration is being

performed currently (Active or Inactive).
Last Field Calibration Result: Indicating the result of the last Field calibration
process (Passed, Failed or None if no Field calibration has been done).
Bandwidth Used for Last Field Calibration: The bandwidth used by the device
during the last Field Calibration. A new Field Calibration should be performed
after changing the bandwidth (sub-band) used by the device.

Available Calibration Options: Indicating whether Field, Factory or both Field

and Factory Calibration options are available for selection.
Selected Calibration Option: The currently selected Calibration Option to Use.
4.2.6.3 Network Management Parameters

The Network Management Parameters menu enables protecting the Unit from
unauthorized access by defining a set of discrete IP addresses as well as IP
address ranges from which the unit can be managed using protocols such as
Telnet, FTP, TFTP, SNMP, DHCP and ICMP. This excludes management messages
generated in the unit, such as Traps or Ping Test frames, which are not filtered.
The direction from which management access is permitted can also be configured,
which means that management access may be permitted from the wireless
medium only, from the wired Ethernet only, or from both.
The Network Management Menu also enables managing transmission of traps,

including definition of up to 10 traps destination IP addresses and the associated
community strings. In addition, the menu enables specifying the IP address of a
connected AP client device to facilitate remote management of a BreezeACCESS
WI2 system.
The Network Management Parameters menu includes the following options:
Access to Network Management
Network Management Filtering
Set Network Management IP address
Delete a Network Management IP Address
Delete All Network Management IP Addresses
Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges
SNMP Traps (AU only)
Wi2 IP Address (SU only)
4.2.6.3.1 Access to Network Management

The Access to Network Management option defines the port through which the
unit can be managed. The following options are available:

From Wireless Link Only
From Ethernet Only
From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link
The default selection is From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link.
CAUTION
Be careful not to block your access to the unit. For example, if you manage an SU via the wireless
link, setting the Access to Network Management parameter to From Ethernet Only completely
blocks your management access to the unit. In this case, a technician may be required to change
the settings at the user's site.
4.2.6.3.2 Network Management Filtering

The Network Management Filtering option enables or disables the IP address
based management filtering. If management filtering is enabled, the unit can only
be managed by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in either
the Network Management IP Addresses list or in the Network Management IP
Address Ranges list, described below, and that are connected to the unit via the
defined port(s). The following options are available:
Disable: No IP address based filtering is configured.
Activate IP Filter on Ethernet Port: Applicable only if the Access to Network

Management parameter is configured to either From Ethernet Only or From
Both Ethernet and Wireless Link. The unit can be managed from the Ethernet
port only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in the Set
Network Management IP Addresses parameter. If the Access to Network
Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet and Wireless
Link then no IP address based filtering is configured for the wireless port.
Activate IP Filter on Wireless Link Port: Applicable only if the Access to

Network Management parameter is configured to either From Wireless Link
Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link. The unit can be managed from
the wireless port only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the
entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter. If the Access
to Network Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet and
Wireless Link then no IP address based filtering is configured for the Ethernet
port.

Activate IP filter on Both Ethernet and Wireless Link Ports: Applicable to

all options of the Access to Network Management parameter. The unit can be
managed from the port(s) defined by the Access to Network Management
parameter only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in
the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter.
The default selection is Disable.
4.2.6.3.3 Set Network Management IP Address

The Set Network Management IP Address option enables defining up to 10 IP
addresses of devices that can manage the unit if the Network Management
Filtering option is enabled.
The default Network Management IP Address is 0.0.0.0 (all 10 addresses).
4.2.6.3.4 Delete a Network Management IP Address

The Delete Network Management IP Address option enables deleting IP address
entries from the Network Management IP Addresses list.
4.2.6.3.5 Delete All Network Management IP Addresses

The Delete All Network Management IP Addresses option enables deleting all
entries from the Network Management IP Addresses list.
4.2.6.3.6 Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges

The Set/Change Network Management IP address Ranges menu enables defining,
updating or deleting IP address ranges from which the unit can be managed if the
Network Management Filtering option is enabled. This is in addition to the
previous options in the Network Management menu that enable defining,
updating and deleting discrete IP addresses.
The menu includes the following options:
4.2.6.3.6.1 Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges

The Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables
defining/updating up to 10 IP address ranges from which the unit can be
managed if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled.
The default Network Management IP Address Range is 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 (all 10

ranges).
A range can be defined using a string that includes either a start and end address,
in the format "<start address> to <end address>" (example: 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.255), or a base address and a mask, in the format "<base address>
mask <mask>" (example: 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0).

4.2.6.3.6.2 Delete Network Management IP Address Range

The Delete Network Management IP Address Range option enables deleting IP
address range entries from the Network Management IP Address Ranges list.
4.2.6.3.6.3 Delete All Network Management IP Address Ranges

The Delete All Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables deleting all
entries from the Network Management IP Address Ranges list.
4.2.6.3.7 SNMP Traps (AU Only)

The SNMP submenu enables or disables the transmission of SNMP Traps. If this
option is enabled, up to 10 IP addresses of stations to which SNMP traps are sent
can be defined.
Starting on SW Version 5.0, traps are generated and sent only by the AU: relevant
events in an SU are reported by the SU to the serving AU that generates the
applicable trap on behalf of the SU.
For more details on the system traps see the relevant Traps document.
4.2.6.3.7.1 Send SNMP Traps

The Send SNMP Traps option enables or disables the sending of SNMP traps.
4.2.6.3.7.2 SNMP Traps Destination IP Addresses

The SNMP Traps Destination IP Addresses submenu enables defining up to 10 IP
addresses of devices to which the SNMP Traps are to be sent.
The default of all 10 SNMP Traps IP destinations is 0.0.0.0.
4.2.6.3.7.3 SNMP Traps Community

The SNMP Traps Community option enables defining the Community name for
each IP address to which SNMP Trap messages are to be sent.
Valid strings: Up to 8 ASCII characters.
The default for all 10 addresses is "public", which is the default Read community.
4.2.6.3.7.4 Delete One Trap Address

The Delete One Trap Address option enables deleting Trap address entries from
the SNMP Traps Addresses list.
4.2.6.3.7.5 Delete All Trap Addresses

The Delete All Trap Addresses option enables deleting all entries from the SNMP
Traps Addresses list.

4.2.6.3.8 Wi2 IP Address (SU Only)

The BreezeACCESS WI2 system comprises a self-contained combination of an
advanced WiFi Access Point and a BreezeACCESS SU-ODU that provides
backhaul connectivity. The Wi2 IP Address parameter enables the installer to
configure in the SU the IP address of the WiFi AP connected to it, providing
availability of the IP address information for remote management of the AP.
The default Wi2 IP Address is 0.0.0.0 (meaning none).
4.2.6.4 Bridge Parameters

The Bridge Parameters menu provides a series of parameter sets that enables
configuring parameters such as control and filtering options for broadcast
transmissions, VLAN support, and Type of Service prioritization.
The Bridge Parameters menu includes the following options:
VLAN Support
Ethernet Broadcast Filtering (SU only)
Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter
Bridge Aging Time
Roaming Option (SU only)
Broadcast/Multicast Relaying (AU only)
Unicast Relaying (AU only)
MAC Address List (AU only)
4.2.6.4.1 VLAN Support

The VLAN Support menu enables defining the parameters related to the IEEE
802.1Q compliant VLAN aware (Virtual LAN aware) feature of the units. Each
VLAN includes stations that can communicate with each other, but cannot
communicate with stations belonging to different VLANs. The VLAN feature also
provides the ability to set traffic priorities for transmission of certain frames. The
information related to the VLAN is included in the VLAN Tag Header, which is
inserted in each frame between the MAC header and the data. VLAN
implementation in BreezeACCESS VL units supports frame routing by port
information, whereby each port is connected to only one VLAN.

The system also supports the 802.1 QinQ standard, which defines the way to have
2 VLAN tags (double-tagged frames). This procedure allows an additional VLAN
tag, called Service Provider VLAN tag, to be inserted into an existing IEEE 802.1Q
tagged Ethernet frame. This is a solution to transport multiple customers' VLANs
across the service provider's network without interfering with each other.
The VLAN Support menu includes the following parameters:
VLAN Link Type
VLAN ID - Data (SU only)
VLAN ID - Management
Service Provider VLAN ID (SU only)
VLAN Forwarding
VLAN Relaying (AU only)
VLAN Traffic Priority
VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype
4.2.6.4.1.1 VLAN ID-Data (SU only)

The VLAN ID-Data is applicable only when the VLAN Link Type parameter is set to
Access Link. It enables defining the VLAN ID for data frames, which identifies the
VLAN to which the unit belongs.
Valid values range from 1 to 4094.
Default value: 1.
The VLAN ID-Data affects frames received from the wireless link port, as follows:
Only tagged frames with a VLAN ID (VID) equal to the VLAN ID-Data defined in
the unit are forwarded to the Ethernet port.
The tag headers are removed from the data frames received from the wireless
link before they are transmitted on the Ethernet port.
The VLAN ID-Data affects frames received from the Ethernet port, as follows:

A VLAN Data Tag is inserted in all untagged frames received from the Ethernet
port before transmission on the wireless link. The tag includes the values of
the VLAN ID-Data and the VLAN Priority-Data parameters.
Tagged frames received on Ethernet port, which are meant to be forwarded to

the wireless link port, are discarded. This includes frames with tagging for
prioritization purposes only.
4.2.6.4.1.2 VLAN ID-Management

The VLAN ID-Management is applicable for all link types. It enables defining the
VLAN ID for management frames, which identifies remote stations for
management purposes. This applies to all management applications using
protocols such as SNMP, TFTP, ICMP (ping), DHCP and Telnet. All
servers/stations using these protocols must tag the management frames sent to
the unit with the value of the VLAN ID-Management parameter.
Valid values: 1 to 4094 or 65535 (No VLAN).
If the VLAN ID-Management is other than 65535:
Only single-tagged management frames with a matching VLAN ID, or

double-tagged management frames with a matching Service Provider VLAN ID
received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit.
A VLAN Management Tag is inserted in all management frames generated by

the unit before transmission on either the Ethernet or wireless link port. The
tag includes the values of the VLAN ID-Management and the VLAN
Priority-Management parameters.
If the VLAN ID-Management is 65535 (No VLAN):
For Access, Trunk and Hybrid links: Only untagged management frames
received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit.
An AU operating in Service Provider link mode with VLAN ID - Management =

65535 cannot be managed from either the Ethernet or wireless ports.
An SU operating in Service Provider link mode with VLAN ID - Management =

65535 will accept untagged management frames from the Ethernet port. From
the wireless port it will accept only tagged frames with a VLAN ID tag that
matches the defined Service Provider VLAN ID.

Management frames generated by the unit are not tagged.
The following table summarizes the functionality of the internal management port
in accordance with the value of the VLAN ID-Management parameter. The table is
valid for all link types. Refer to the VLAN Link Type - Access Link, Trunk Link and
Service Provider Link options for some restrictions when configuring this
parameter.
Table 4-5: VLAN Management Port Functionality
Action Management Port - Internal

Receive from Ethernet when Link Type is Access, Tagged frames, matching VID-M Untagged frames
Trunk or Hybrid when VID-M=65535
Receive from Ethernet when Link Type is Service Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Provider
Receive from Wireless when Link Type is Access, Tagged frames, matching VID-M Untagged frames
Trunk or Hybrid when VID-M=65535
Receive from wireless when Link Type is Service Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Provider
Transmit Insert VID-M, PID-M
Table Legend:
VID-M: VLAN ID-Management
PID-M: VLAN Priority-Management
4.2.6.4.1.3 VLAN Link Type

The VLAN Link Type parameter enables defining the functionality of the VLAN
aware capability of the unit.
The available options are Hybrid Link, Trunk Link, Access Link and Service
Provider Link (Access Link option is available only in SUs).
The default selection is Hybrid Link.
4.2.6.4.1.3.1 Access Link (SU only)

Access Link transfers frames while tagging/untagging them since all devices
connected to the unit are VLAN unaware. Thus, the unit cannot transfer tagged
frames.
Table 4-6 summarizes the functionality of the data port for an Access link.

Table 4-6: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Access Link
Action Data Port - SU

Receive from Ethernet Untagged frames
Accept from Wireless Tagged frames, matching VID-D
Tag Insert VID-D, PID-D (to wireless)
Tag Remove Yes (to Ethernet)
Table Legend:
VID-D: VLAN ID-Data
PID-D: VLAN Priority-Data
4.2.6.4.1.3.2 Trunk Link

Trunk Link transfers only tagged frames, as all devices connected to the unit are
VLAN aware. Only tagged data frames received on the Ethernet or wireless link
ports are forwarded.
CAUTION
It is not recommended that you configure a unit as a Trunk Link with the VLAN ID-Management
parameter set at 65535, as it does not forward any 'NO VLAN' management frames to its other port,
making it impossible to manage devices connected behind the unit that are also configured with 'NO
VLAN'.
If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, a data frame received with a VLAN ID
that is not a member of the unit's VLAN Forwarding List is discarded.
NOTE
If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, be sure to include the VLAN ID-Management
value of all units that should be managed via the wireless port of the unit, in the Forwarding List.
If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled in an AU, a data frame relayed with a VLAN
ID that is not a member of the unit's VLAN Relaying List is discarded.
NOTE
If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled and you manage your devices from behind an SU unit,
be sure to include the VLAN ID-Management value of all units to be managed when relaying
via the wireless port of the AU unit, in the Relaying List. If the VLAN Forwarding option is also
enabled in the AU, these VLAN IDs should also be included in the Forwarding List.
Table 4-7 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Trunk link.

Table 4-7: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Trunk Link
Action Data Port - AU and SU

Accept from Ethernet Tagged frames.
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with VLAN ID

values which are included in the Forwarding list
Accept from Wireless Tagged frames
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with VLAN ID

values which are included in the Forwarding list
Tag Insert No
Tag Remove No
4.2.6.4.1.3.3 Hybrid Link

Hybrid Link transfers both tagged and untagged frames, as the devices connected
to the unit can be either VLAN aware or VLAN unaware. This is equivalent to
defining no VLAN support, as the unit is transparent to VLAN.
Table 4-8 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Hybrid link.
Table 4-8: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Hybrid Link
Action Data Port - AU and SU

Accept from Ethernet All
Accept from Wireless All
Tag Insert No
Tag Remove No
4.2.6.4.1.3.4 Service Provider Link

A Service Provider Link transfers both single tagged frames (Service Provider tag)
and double-tagged frames (Service Provider tag + Customer tag). The Service
Provider tag includes the Service Provider VLAN ID and the VLAN QinQ Ethertype.

Figure 4-2: Service Provider Link
The following tables summarize the functionality of the SU/AU data port for a
Service Provider Link.
Table 4-9: VLAN Data Port Functionality for SU - Service Provider Link
Action Data Port -SU

Accept from Ethernet Untagged frames
Single tagged frames:
If Forwarding is disabled
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with VLAN ID values which

are included in the Forwarding List
Accept from Wireless Single tagged frames: only frames with a Service Provider tag whose
parameters match the Service Provider parameters defined in the unit
(Service Provider VLAN ID and VLAN QinQ Ethertype)
Double tagged frames: only frames with a Service Provider tag whose
parameters match the Service Provider parameters defined in the unit
(Service Provider VLAN ID and VLAN QinQ Ethertype). If Forwarding
is enabled, only frames with Customer VLAN ID values that are
included in the Forwarding List
Tag Insert Service Provider (SP) tag (to wireless)
Tag Remove Yes (to Ethernet)

Table 4-10: VLAN Data Port Functionality for AU - Service Provider Link
Action Data Port -AU

Accept from Ethernet Single tagged frames:

Double tagged frames:
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with Service Provider VLAN

ID values which are included in the Forwarding List
Accept from Wireless Single tagged frames:

Double tagged frames:
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with Service Provider VLAN

ID values which are included in the Forwarding List
Tag Insert No
Tag Remove No
NOTE
The following units management limitations apply when using a Service Provider Link:
The unit can be managed only with tagged frames: VLAN ID - Management must be other than
65535.
To enable proper management, all units in a cell (the AU and all SUs served by it) must use the
VLAN ID - Management.
The VLAN ID - Management must differ from the Customer's VLAN ID - Data.
4.2.6.4.1.4 VLAN Forwarding (AU and SU)

The VLAN Forwarding feature is applicable only for Trunk Links and Service
Provider Links. It enables defining the VLAN ID values to be included in the VLAN
Forwarding List. If the Link Type is defined as either a Trunk Link or a Service

Provider Link and the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, a data frame received
with a VLAN ID (or a Service Provider VLAN ID) that is not a member of the unit's
VLAN Forwarding List is discarded.
The VLAN Forwarding submenu provides the following options:
4.2.6.4.1.4.1 VLAN Forwarding Support

The VLAN Forwarding Support option enables or disables the VLAN Forwarding
feature.
Available selections are Disable and Enable.
4.2.6.4.1.4.2 Add Forwarding VLAN ID

The Add Forwarding VLAN ID option enables adding a VLAN ID to the VLAN
Forwarding List. One VLAN ID can be entered at a time. The maximum number of
VLAN IDs in the VLAN Forwarding List is 20.
Valid values are 1 to 4094.
4.2.6.4.1.4.3 Remove Forwarding VLAN ID

The Remove Forwarding VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from the
VLAN ID Forwarding List.
Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094) that are included in the VLAN
Forwarding List.
4.2.6.4.1.4.4 Show VLAN ID Forwarding List

The Show VLAN Forwarding List option displays the values of the VLAN IDs
included in the VLAN Forwarding List.
NOTE
If the VLAN ID Forwarding List is empty and the VLAN Forwarding Support is set to Enable, then all
data frames are discarded.
If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled, then all VLAN IDs
configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List.
4.2.6.4.1.5 VLAN Relaying (AU only)

The VLAN Relaying feature is applicable only for Trunk Links and Service Provider
Links. It enables defining the VLAN ID values to be included in the VLAN Relaying
List.
If the Link Type is defined as either a Trunk Link or a Service Provider Link and
the VLAN Relaying Support option is enabled, a frame relayed from the wireless
link, which is a frame received from the wireless link that should be transmitted
back through the wireless link, with a VLAN ID (or a Service Provider VLAN ID)

that is not a member of the unit's VLAN Relaying List, is discarded. If VLAN
Forwarding Support is also enabled, it is necessary to configure all the VLAN IDs
in the Relaying List also in the Forwarding List to enable the relaying operation.
The VLAN Relaying menu provides the following options:
4.2.6.4.1.5.1 VLAN Relaying Support

The VLAN Relaying Support option enables or disables the VLAN Relaying feature.
Available selections are Disable and Enable.
4.2.6.4.1.5.2 Add Relaying VLAN ID

The Add Relaying VLAN ID option enables adding a VLAN ID to the VLAN Relaying
List. One VLAN ID can be entered at a time. The maximum number of VLAN IDs in
the VLAN Relaying List is 20.
Valid values are 1 to 4094.
4.2.6.4.1.5.3 Remove Relaying VLAN ID

The Remove Relaying VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from the VLAN
ID Relaying List. Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094)) that are included in
the VLAN Relaying List.
4.2.6.4.1.5.4 Show VLAN ID Relaying List

The Show VLAN Relaying option displays the values of the VLAN IDs included in
the VLAN Relaying List.
NOTE
If the VLAN ID Relaying List is empty and the VLAN Relaying Support is Enabled, then all data
frames relayed from the wireless link are discarded.
If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled, then all VLAN IDs
configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List.
4.2.6.4.1.6 Service Provider VLAN ID (SU only)

The Service Provider VLAN ID is applicable only when the VLAN Link Type
parameter is set to Service Provider Link. It enables defining the Service Provider
VLAN ID for data frames, which identifies the Service Provider VLAN to which the
unit belongs.
The range is 1 to 4094.
The Service provider VLAN ID affects frames received from the wireless link port,
as follows:

Both single-tagged frames (having Service Provider VLAN ID tag) and

double-tagged frames (having Service Provider VLAN ID and customer VLAN ID
tags) with matching VLAN ID are forwarded to the Ethernet Port (provided the
Ethertype of the tag matches the configured VLAN QinQ Ethertype).
Before transmitting the frames to the Ethernet port, the Service Provider VLAN
ID tag is removed.
The Service Provider VLAN ID affects frames received from the Ethernet link port,
as follows: A Service Provider tag, that includes the configured Service Provider
VLAN ID (and the VLAN QinQ Ethertype) is inserted in all frames, both tagged and
untagged, before transmission to the wireless link.
4.2.6.4.1.7 VLAN Traffic Priority

The VLAN Traffic Priority menu enables configuring the VLAN Priority field in
applicable frames. These parameters only impact the way in which other VLAN
aware devices in the network will handle the packet. All parameters that affect
prioritization within the BreezeACCESS VL system, including VLAN-based
prioritization, are located in the Traffic Prioritization menu.
The VLAN Traffic Priority menu includes the following parameters:
VLAN Priority - Data (SU only)
VLAN Priority - Management
4.2.6.4.1.7.1 VLAN Priority - Data (SU only)

The VLAN Priority - Data is applicable for Access Links only. It enables configuring
the value of the VLAN Priority field for data frames transmitted to the wireless
link. All data frames are routed to the Low queue. This parameter only impacts
the way other VLAN aware devices handle the packet.
4.2.6.4.1.7.2 VLAN Priority - Management

The VLAN Priority - Management enables defining the value of the VLAN Priority
field for management frames in units with VLAN ID-Management that is other
than 65535. All management frames are routed to the High queue. This
parameter only impacts the way other VLAN aware devices handle the packet.
The default value is 4 for SUs and 0 for AUs.

4.2.6.4.1.8 VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype

The VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype parameter sets the Ethertype of the Service
Provider tag, and is applicable only for Service Provider Links.
The valid values are from 8100 to 9000, 9100 and 9200 (Hex).
The default value is 8100 (Hex).
4.2.6.4.1.9 Show VLAN Parameters

The Show VLAN Parameters option displays the current values of the VLAN
support parameters.
4.2.6.4.2 Ethernet Broadcast Filtering (SU only)

The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu enables defining the layer 2 (Ethernet)
broadcast and multicast filtering capabilities for the selected SU. Filtering the
Ethernet broadcasts enhances the security of the system and saves bandwidth on
the wireless medium by blocking protocols that are typically used in the
customer's LAN but are not relevant for other customers, such as NetBios, which
is used by the Microsoft Network Neighborhood. Enabling this feature blocks
Ethernet broadcasts and multicasts by setting the I/G bit at the destination
address to 1. This feature should not be enabled when there is a router behind the
SU.
The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu includes the following parameters:
Filter Options
DHCP Broadcast Override Filter
PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter
ARP Broadcast Override Filter
4.2.6.4.2.1 Filter Options

The Filter Options enables defining the Ethernet Broadcast filtering functionality
of the unit. Select from the following options:
Disable - no Ethernet Broadcast Filtering.
On Ethernet Port Only - filters broadcast messages received from the

Ethernet port.
On Wireless Port Only - filters broadcast messages received from the wireless
link port.

On Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports - filters broadcast messages received

from both the Ethernet and wireless link ports.
4.2.6.4.2.2 DHCP Broadcast Override Filter

The DHCP Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting
of DHCP messages. Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options
parameter, broadcast messages should be filtered, DHCP broadcasts are
transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable. Select from the following options:
Disable - DHCP Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to

the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter.
Enable - DHCP Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected

value of the Filter Options parameter.
4.2.6.4.2.3 PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter

The PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting
of PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) messages. Even if according to the
selected option in the Filter Options parameter, broadcast messages should be
filtered, PPPoE broadcasts are transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable.
Select from the following options:
Disable - PPPoE Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to

the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter.
Enable - PPPoE Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected

value of the Filter Options parameter.
4.2.6.4.2.4 ARP Broadcast Override Filter

The ARP Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting of
ARP messages. Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options
parameter, broadcast messages should be filtered, ARP broadcasts are
transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable. Select from the following options:
Disable - ARP messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general

filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter.

Enable - ARP messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the
Filter Options parameter.
The default selection is Enable.
4.2.6.4.3 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter

The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter parameters, available in both AU and
SU, enable to limit the number of broadcast and/or multicast packets that can be
transmitted per second, in order to prevent the potential flooding of the wireless
medium by certain ARP attacks.
In SUs, the limiter is placed after the Ethernet Broadcast Filters. For this reason,
the limiter will receive only the packets that pass through these filters. If the
Ethernet filters of the SU are disabled, the limiter will be applied to all relevant
packets received.
When the Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter is enabled and the specified limit
is reached, the unit will send a trap. The trap will be sent periodically till the
number of broadcast/multicast packets will be less than the maximum. The trap
will inform the user how many packets were discarded in the last period.
The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter menu allows viewing and setting the
following parameters:
4.2.6.4.3.1 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Option

The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Option defines the limiter's
functionality. The available options are:
Disable: No limiter
Limit only Broadcast Packets
Limit Multicast Packets that are not Broadcasts
Limit All Multicast Packets (including broadcast)
4.2.6.4.3.2 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Threshold

The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Threshold defines the maximum
number of packets per second that will pass the limiter when it is enabled.
The range is from 0 to 204800 (packets/second).
The default is 50 packets.

4.2.6.4.3.3 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval

The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval defines the
minimum time in minutes between two consecutive transmissions of the trap
indicating the number of packets that were dropped by the limiter since the
previous trap (or since the time that the limit has been exceeded).
The range is from 1 to 60 minutes.
4.2.6.4.4 Bridge Aging Time

The Bridge Aging Time parameter enables selecting the bridge aging time for
learned addresses of devices on both the wired and wireless sides, not including
BreezeACCESS VL units.
The available range is 20 to 2000 seconds.
The default value is 300 seconds.
4.2.6.4.5 Broadcast/Multicast Relaying (AU only)

The Broadcast/Multicast Relaying option enables selecting whether the unit
performs relaying of broadcasts and/or multicasts.
Disable
Broadcast/Multicast Enable
Broadcast Enable
Multicast Enable
If broadcast/multicast relaying if disabled, these packets are sent only to the local
wired LAN and are not sent back to the wireless link. When broadcast and or
multicast relaying is enabled, the relevant packets (broadcasts only, multicasts
only or both broadcasts and multicasts) originating from devices on the wireless
link are transmitted by the AU back to the wireless link devices, as well as to the
wired LAN.
The default selection is Broadcast/Multicast Enable.
4.2.6.4.6 Unicast Relaying (AU only)

The Unicast Relaying option enables selecting whether the unit performs unicast
relaying. When the Unicast Relaying parameter is enabled, unicast packets
originating from devices on the wireless link can be transmitted back to the

wireless link devices. If disabled, these packets are not sent to the wireless link
even if they are intended for devices on the wireless link. Disable the Unicast
Relaying parameter only if all unicast messages from the wireless link are certain
to be directed to the local wired LAN.
4.2.6.4.7 MAC Address List (AU only)

The MAC Address List submenu enables to define a list of up to 100 MAC
addresses as belonging to devices that are either granted or denied service. When
the list is defined as a Deny List, the AU will not provide services to a unit whose
MAC address is included in the list, enabling to disconnect units in cases such as
when the user had fraudulently succeeded to configure the unit to values different
from the subscription plan. When the list is defined as an Allow List, the AU will
provide services only to units with a MAC address that is included in the list.
In addition, the Station Allowed Option enables defining whether an SU with any
MAC address can try to associate with the AU, or only SUs with a MAC address
starting with 00-10-E7 (the supplier's MAC addresses range).
The MAC Address List submenu includes the following:
4.2.6.4.7.1 Add MAC Address to List

Select Add MAC Address to List to add a MAC Address to the List.
4.2.6.4.7.2 Remove MAC Address from List

Select Remove MAC Address from List to remove a MAC Address from the List.
4.2.6.4.7.3 MAC Address List Action

This parameter defines the working mode of the MAC list:
In the case of an Allowed list, if the MAC address is included in the list, the SU
will be able to associate itself with the AU and receive permission for
generating traffic; if it is not found in the list, it will still be associated but
without the permission to generate traffic.
In the case of a Deny list, if the MAC address is included in the list, the SU will
be able to associate itself with the AU but will not be able to generate traffic;
otherwise (if the address is not found in the list) the SU will be associated and
will be able to generate traffic.
Possible options for this parameter are Deny and Allow.
The default is Deny.

4.2.6.4.7.4 Station Allowed Option

Set this parameter to Enable to allow any SU (regardless of its' MAC address to try
associating with the AU). Set it to Disable to allow only SUs whose MAC address
starts with 00-10-E7 to try associating with the AU.
The default is Enabled.
4.2.6.4.7.5 Show MAC Address List

Select Show MAC Address List to display the current list of MAC Addresses
included in the List and the selected List Action.
4.2.6.4.8 Roaming Option (SU only)

The Roaming Option defines the roaming support of the unit. When roaming is
not expected, it is preferable to set this parameter to Disable. This will cause the
unit to start scanning for another AU after losing connectivity with the current AU
only after 7 seconds during which no beacons were received from the current AU.
This will prevent scanning for another AU in cases where no beacons were
received due to a short temporary problem.
When set to Enable, the SU will wait only one second before it starts scanning for
another AU. In addition, when the Roaming Option is enabled, the SU will send
Roaming SNAP messages upon associating with a new AU. This enables fast
distribution of the new location for all clients that are behind the SU. In this case,
the SU will send multicast SNAP messages via the wireless link each time it
associates with a new AU, except for the first association after reset. The SU will
send one SNAP message for each client learned on its Ethernet port, based on its
bridging table. In the SNAP message the clients' MAC address is used as the
source address. The AU that receives this SNAP message learns from it the new
location of the clients. It forwards the SNAP to other AUs and Layer-2 networking
equipment via its Ethernet port, to facilitate uninterrupted connectivity and
correct routing of transmissions to these clients. The new AU as well as the
previous AU with which the SU was associated, will forward the SNAP messages to
all other SUs associated with them.
4.2.6.4.9 Ports Control (SU only)

The Ports Control sub-menu includes the Ethernet Port Control option:
4.2.6.4.9.1 Ethernet Port Control

The Ethernet Port Control option allows enabling or disabling non-management
traffic to/from the Ethernet port. When changed to Disable, all current data
sessions will be terminated. The unit is still manageable via the Ethernet port
even if it is disabled for data traffic.

4.2.6.4.10 Show Bridge Parameters

The Show Bridge Parameters option displays the current values of the Bridge
parameters.
4.2.6.5 Performance Parameters

The Performance Parameters menu enables defining a series of parameters that
control the method by which traffic is transmitted through the wireless access
network.
The Performance Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
RTS Threshold
Minimum Contention Window
Maximum Contention Window
Multicast Modulation Level (AU only)
Maximum Modulation Level
Average SNR Memory Factor
Number of HW Retries
Burst Mode
Adaptive Modulation Algorithm
Concatenation Parameters
4.2.6.5.1 RTS Threshold

The RTS Threshold parameter defines the minimum frame size that requires an
RTS/CTS (Request To Send/Clear To Send) handshake. Frames whose size is
smaller than the RTS Threshold value are transmitted directly to the wireless link
without being preceded with RTS frames. Setting this parameter to a value larger
than the maximum frame size eliminates the RTS/CTS handshake for frames
transmitted by this unit.
The available values range from 20 to 4092 bytes for units with HW revision C or
higher, and 20 to 2200 for units with HW revision A or B.

The default value for SUs is 60 bytes.
For AUs with HW revision C or higher (except AUs operating in the 900 MHz band)
the default is 4092, and for AUs with HW revision A or B the default is 2200. It is
recommended that these values be used to ensure that RTS/CTS is never used in
the AU.
For AUs in the 900 MHz band the default is 60. When Tx power is bellow 22 dBm
The RTS Threshold can be changed to 4092 to improve overall performance. If the
Tx power is higher then 22 dBm it is strongly recommended not to change the RTS
Threshold from its default value of 60 since it may result in an excessive number
of CRC errors on the received side.
4.2.6.5.2 Minimum Contention Window

The Minimum Contention Window parameter determines the time that a unit
waits from the time it has concluded that there are no detectable transmissions by
other units until it attempts to transmit. The BreezeACCESS VL system uses a
special mechanism based on detecting the presence of a carrier signal and
analyzing the information contained in the transmissions of the AU to estimate
the activity of other SUs served by the AU. The target is to minimize collisions in
the wireless medium resulting from attempts of more than one unit to transmit at
the same time.
The system uses an exponential Back-off algorithm to resolve contention between

several units that want to access the wireless medium. The method requires each
station to choose a random number N between 0 and a given number C each time
it wants to access the medium. The unit will attempt to access the medium only
after a time equal to DIFS (for more details refer to section “Arbitration
Inter-Frame Spacing (AIFS)” on page 152) plus N time slots, always checking if a
different unit has accessed the medium before. Each time the unit tries to
transmit and a collision occurs; the maximum number C used for the random
number selection will be increased to the next available value. The available
values are 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023.
The Minimum Contention Window parameter is the first maximum number C

used in the back-off algorithm. The higher the number of SUs served by the same
AU, the higher the Minimum Contention Window for each SU should be. In
addition, when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled, the Minimum
and Maximum Contention Window parameters can be configured to provide
certain units with an advantage over other units.
The available values are 0, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023. A value of 0
means that the contention window algorithm is not used and that the unit will
attempt to access the medium immediately after a time equal to DIFS.

CAUTION
A value of 0 disables the contention window back-off algorithm. It should only be used in
point-to-point applications. For more details on configuring units in a point-to-point link refer to
section “Arbitration Inter-Frame Spacing (AIFS)” on page 152.
4.2.6.5.3 Maximum Contention Window

The Maximum Contention Window parameter defines the upper limit for the
maximum number C used in the back-off algorithm as described in Minimum
Contention Window above.
The available values are 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023.
4.2.6.5.4 Multicast Modulation Level (AU only)

The Multicast Modulation Level parameter defines the modulation level used for
transmitting multicast and broadcast data frames. Multicast and broadcast
transmissions are not acknowledged; therefore if a multicast or broadcast
transmission is not properly received there is no possibility of retransmitting. It is
recommended that you set a lower modulation level for broadcast and multicast
frame transmissions to increase the probability that they are received without
errors.
The Multicast Modulation Level parameter is applicable only to data frames.

Beacons and other wireless management and control frames are always
transmitted at the lowest modulation level according to the Sub-Band.
The minimum and maximum values for the Multicast Modulation Level are
defined by the Sub-Band in use. For information on how to view the Sub-Bands
supported by the unit and the supported parameters' values and options, refer to
section “Show Country Dependent Parameters” on page 94. Currently, all Sub
Bands support the entire range of modulation levels, from 1 to 8. However, the
highest modulation level supported by units with HW revision A is modulation
level 7.
The default value is the lowest supported modulation level (modulation level 1).
4.2.6.5.5 Maximum Modulation Level

When the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm (see section “Adaptive Modulation
Algorithm (Multi Rate)” on page 189) is enabled, it changes the modulation level
dynamically according to link conditions. The purpose is to increase the
probability of using the maximum possible modulation level at any given moment.
Although the algorithm will avoid using modulation levels that are too high for the

prevailing link conditions, it might be better under certain conditions to limit the
use of higher modulation levels. If the link quality is not sufficient, it is
recommended that the maximum modulation level be decreased, as higher
modulation levels increase the error rate. In such conditions, a higher Maximum
Modulation Level increases the number or retransmissions before the modulation
level is being reduced by the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm. A high number of
retransmissions reduces the overall throughput of the applicable SU as well as all
other SUs associated with the same AU.
The link quality can be estimated based on the SNR measurement of the SU at the
AU, which can be viewed in the MAC Address Database option in the Site Survey
menu. If the measured SNR is less than a certain threshold, it is recommended
that the maximum modulation level of the SU be decreased in accordance with
Table 4-11, using the values of typical sensitivity. It is recommended to add a 2
dB safety margin to compensate for possible measurement inaccuracy or variance
in the link quality.
NOTE
The SNR measurement at the AU is accurate only when receiving transmissions from the
applicable SU. If necessary, use the Ping Test utility in the Site Survey menu to verify data
transmission.
When the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm is disabled, this parameter will serve to
determine Fixed Modulation Level used for transmissions.
The minimum and maximum values for the Maximum Modulation Level are
defined by the Sub-Band in use. For information on how to view the Sub-Bands
supported by the unit and the supported parameters' values and options, refer to
section “Show Country Dependent Parameters” on page 94. Currently, all Sub
Bands support the entire range of modulation levels, from 1 to 8. However, the
highest modulation level supported by units with HW revision A is modulation
level 7.
The default is the highest supported modulation level (8 for all units with HW
revision B or higher, 7 for units with HW revision A).

SNR > 23 dB 8
21 dB < SNR < 23 dB 7
16 dB < SNR < 21 dB 6
13 dB < SNR < 16 dB 5


10 dB < SNR < 13 dB 4
8 dB < SNR < 10 dB 3
7 dB < SNR < 8 dB 2
6 dB < SNR < 7 dB 1
4.2.6.5.6 Average SNR Memory Factor

The Average SNR Memory Factor defines the weight of history (value of last
calculated average SNR) in the formula used for calculating the current average
SNR for received data frames. This average SNR is used by the ATPC algorithm in
the AU and is also included in the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm information
messages transmitted by the AU and the SU. The higher the value of this
parameter, the higher is the weight of history in the formula.
Available values: -1 to 32. -1 is for no weight for history, meaning that average
SNR equals the last measured SNR.
Default value: 5
4.2.6.5.7 Number of HW Retries

The Number of HW Retries parameter defines the maximum number of times that
an unacknowledged packet is retransmitted. When the Adaptive Modulation
Algorithm is disabled, a frame will be dropped when the number of unsuccessful
retransmissions reaches this value. For details on the effect of this parameter
when the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm is enabled, refer to section “Adaptive
Modulation Algorithm (Multi Rate)” on page 189.
NOTE
The Number of HW Retries parameter is not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option
is enabled.
The available values range is from 1 to 14.
4.2.6.5.8 Burst Mode

Burst mode provides an increased throughput by reducing the overhead
associated with transmissions in the wireless medium. In a burst transmission
the inter-frame spacing is reduced and unicast data frames are transmitted

without any contention period (burst mode is not activated on

broadcasts/multicasts).
The Burst Mode is available only if Burst Mode is supported by the Sub-Band in
use. For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and the
In AUs with HW Revision B or lower, Burst Mode cannot be activated when DFS is
used. In AUs with HW Revision B or lower, the Burst Mode option will be "blocked"
upon trying to enable Burst Mode when DFS is enabled. This limitation does not
apply to AUs with HW Revision C.
In SUs and AUs with HW Revision B or lower, Burst Mode cannot be activated
when using WEP for data encryption. In units with HW Revision B or lower, the
Burst Mode option will be "blocked" upon trying to enable it when using WEP for
data encryption. This limitation does not apply to units with HW Revision C.
NOTE
The Burst Mode parameters are not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is
enabled.
4.2.6.5.8.1 Burst Mode Option

The Burst Mode Option enables or disables the Burst Mode operation.
4.2.6.5.8.2 Burst Mode Time Interval

The Burst Mode Time Interval defines the burst size, which is the time in which
data frames are sent immediately without contending for the wireless medium.
The range is 1 to the value of the Maximum Burst Duration defined for the
Sub-Band.
The default is 5 milliseconds or the value of Maximum Burst Duration defined for
the Sub-Band (the lower of the two values).
4.2.6.5.9 Adaptive Modulation Algorithm (Multi Rate)

The Adaptive Modulation Algorithm enables adapting the modulation level of
transmitted data to the prevailing conditions of the applicable radio link. The
algorithm provides Access Units with simultaneous, adaptive support for multiple
Subscriber Units at different modulation levels, as transmission's modulation
level decisions are made separately for each associated SU.

Link quality fluctuates due to various environmental conditions. Dynamically

switching between the possible modulation levels increases the probability of
using the maximum modulation level suitable for the current radio link quality at
any given moment.
The decisions made by the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm for the modulation
level to be used are based on multiple parameters, including information on
received signal quality (SNR) that is received periodically from the destination
unit, the time that has passed since last transmission to the relevant unit, and
the recent history of successful and unsuccessful transmissions/retransmissions.
In the AU the decision algorithm is performed separately for each SU.
The transmission/retransmission mechanism operates as follows:
1 Each new frame (first transmission attempt) will be transmitted at a

modulation level selected by the Adaptive Modulation algorithm.
2 If first transmission trial has failed, the frame will be retransmitted at the
same modulation level up to the maximum number of retransmission
attempts defined by the Number of HW Retries parameter.
The Adaptive Modulation Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.5.9.1 Adaptive Modulation Option

The Adaptive Modulation Option enables or disables the Adaptive Modulation
decision algorithm. When enabled, the algorithm supports decrease/increase of
transmission's modulation levels between the lowest possible level to the value
configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter. If the Maximum
Modulation Level is set at the lowest possible level, the Adaptive Modulation
algorithm has no effect.
4.2.6.5.9.2 Minimum Interval Between Adaptive Modulation Messages

The Minimum Interval Between Adaptive Modulation Messages sets the minimum
interval between two consecutive adaptive modulation messages, carrying
information on the SNR of received signals. The messages in the AU include SNR
information on all the SUs associated with it.
The available range is from 1 to 3600 seconds.
The default is 4 seconds.
4.2.6.5.9.3 Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds

Enables selection between Normal and High decision thresholds for the Adaptive
Modulation algorithm. In links with a low SNR (below 13), the Adaptive
Modulation algorithm may not stabilize on the correct modulation level when

using the standard decision thresholds. In this case the algorithm may try to use
a modulation level that is too high, resulting in a relatively large number of
dropped frames. The "High" option solves this limitation and ensures good
performance also in links with a low SNR.
The default is Normal.
4.2.6.5.10 Concatenation Parameters

The Concatenation mechanism enables bundling several data frames into a single
frame for transmission to the wireless link. This feature improves throughput and
reduces the overhead in the wireless medium, by requiring only one CRC for each
concatenated frame, one RTS/CTS cycle if applicable, and a single waiting period
according to the contention window mechanism before transmission. When
concatenation is enabled, data packets in the queue of the internal bridge can be
accumulated before the concatenated frame is transmitted to the wireless
medium. Data frames can be accumulated up to a maximum frame size of 2200
bytes for units with HW revision A or B, or 4032 bytes for units with HW revision
C or higher. In the AU, the concatenation process is performed separately for each
destination SU.
NOTE
Using the Link Capability exchange mechanism, each unit learns the HW Revision and the SW
Version of the unit(s) associated with it. A concatenated frame with a length exceeding 2200 bytes
may be generated and transmitted only if both the source and destination units have HW Revision C
or higher. If either the source or destination unit uses SW Version 3.0 or 3.1, then the maximum size
of the concatenated frame is 3400 bytes, and the maximum number of data frames that can be
bundled into a concatenated frame is 2 for units with SW version 3.0 and 8 for units with SW version
3.1.
A frame is a candidate for bundling into a concatenated frame if all the following
conditions are met:
The frame is a data frame
The destination is an entity behind the destination AU/SU.
The destination AU/SU can support the feature (uses SW version 3.0 or
higher).
When a frame is identified as an eligible candidate for concatenation, it is marked

accordingly and will be processed according to the following:

If there is no concatenated frame designated to the same destination unit in

the queue:
» If the hardware queue is empty - the frame is transmitted immediately.
» Otherwise (the queue is not empty) - the frame is inserted to the queue as a
concatenated frame.
If a concatenated frame designated to the same destination unit exists in the

queue:
» If the combined size of both frames is above the maximum allowed

concatenated frame size - both frames are transmitted as two separate
frames.
» Otherwise (the combined frames size is below the maximum size) - the new
frame is added to the concatenated frame. If the number of data frames in
the concatenated frame has reached the maximum allowed (applicable only
if the destination unit uses SW version 3.0 or 3.1) - the concatenated frame
will be transmitted to the wireless medium. Otherwise - the concatenated
frame remains in the queue (until the hardware queue becomes free).
NOTE
When a frame is marked as a candidate for concatenation, it will be transmitted as a concatenated

frame. If it is not bundled with another data frame before transmission, it will be a concatenated
frame with a single data frame (Concatenated Frame Single). If it is bundled with two or more data
frames, it will be a concatenated frame with either double data frames (Concatenated Frame
Double) or more data frames (Concatenated Frame More).
The Concatenation Parameters submenu includes:
4.2.6.5.10.1 Concatenation Option

The Concatenation Option enables or disables the concatenation mechanism.
4.2.6.5.10.2 Maximum Concatenated Frame Size

The Maximum Concatenated Frame Size parameter defines the maximum size (in
bytes) for a concatenated frame.
The range is:
256 to 2200 bytes for units with HW revision A or B
256 to 4032 bytes for units with HW revision C or higher

The Default values are:
2200 for units with HW revision A or B
4032 for units with HW revision C or higher
4.2.6.6 Service Parameters

The Service Parameters menu enables defining user filtering, MIR/CIR
parameters, traffic prioritization parameters and DRAP parameters.
The Service Parameters menu includes the following options:
User Filtering Parameters (SU only)
MIR and CIR Parameters
Traffic Prioritization
DRAP Parameters (AU only)
Wireless Link Prioritization (only AU with a license for the feature)
4.2.6.6.1 User Filtering Parameters (SU only)

The User Filtering Parameters submenu enables defining the IP addresses of user
devices authorized to access the wireless medium for security and/or control
purposes. In addition, it can be used to enable the transmission and reception of
specific protocol frames. These filtering options do not affect management frames
sent to or generated by the unit.
The User Filtering Parameters menu provides the following options:
4.2.6.6.1.1 User Filtering Option

The User Filtering Option disables or enables the User Filtering feature. The
following options are available:
Disable - no filtering.
IP Protocol Only - only IP Protocol packets pass.
User Defined Addresses Only - only IP frames from/to IP addresses included

in the User Filter Addresses list pass.

PPPoE Protocol Only - only PPPoE messages pass (Ethernet type 0x8863 and
0x8864).
4.2.6.6.1.2 Set/Change Filter IP Address Range

The Set/Change Filter IP Address Ranges option enables defining/updating up to
8 IP address ranges to/from which IP frames are to pass if the User Defined
Addresses Only option is selected in the User Filtering Option parameter.
The default Filter IP Address Range is 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 (all 8 ranges).
A range can be defined using a string that includes either a start and end address,
in the format "<start address> to <end address>" (example: 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.255), or a base address and a mask, in the format "<base address>
mask <mask>" (example: 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0).
4.2.6.6.1.3 Delete Filter IP Address Range

The Delete Filter IP Address Range option enables deleting IP address range
entries from the Filter IP Address Ranges list.
4.2.6.6.1.4 Delete All User Filtering Entries

The Delete All User Filtering Entries option enables deleting all entries from the
Filter IP Address Ranges list.
4.2.6.6.1.5 DHCP Unicast Override Filter

When user filtering is activated, unicast DHCP messages are filtered out; therefore
the unit cannot communicate with the DHCP server. The DHCP Unicast Override
Filter option enables to overcome this problem. When enabled, unicast DHCP
messages pass, overriding the user filtering mechanism.
The default is Disable DHCP Unicast.
4.2.6.6.1.6 Show User Filtering Parameters

The Show All User Filtering Parameters option displays the current value of the
User Filtering Option and the list of User Filtering addresses, subnet masks and
ranges.
4.2.6.6.2 MIR and CIR Parameters

The CIR (Committed Information Rate) specifies the minimum data rate
guaranteed to the relevant subscriber. The MIR (Maximum Information Rate)
value specifies the maximum data rate available for burst transmissions, provided
such bandwidth is available.
Under normal conditions, the actual Information Rate (IR) is between the
applicable CIR and MIR values, based on the formula IR=CIR+K(MIR - CIR).

In this formula K is between 0 and 1 and is determined dynamically by the AU

according to overall demand in the cell and the prevailing conditions that
influence the performance of the wireless link. In some situations the minimum
rate (CIR) cannot be provided. This may result from high demand and poor
wireless link conditions and/or high demand in over-subscribed cells. When this
occurs, the actual information rate is lower than the CIR, and IR = (1+K)*CIR,
where K < 0. The K value to be used in the cell is advertised by the AU in every
beacon, and it is changed every second based on comparison of the traffic during
the last one second interval with the traffic during the previous one second
interval. The advertised K value is used by each SU to calculate the amount of
data that can be transmitted. This algorithm ensures fair resource distribution
among SUs, based on their configured CIR/MIR values.
The MIR Threshold Percent parameter determines the level of wireless link
utilization above which the MIR/CIR mechanism is activated. A Threshold of 0%
allows CIR only. A threshold of 100% means MIR only. For other values, if the
actual wireless link utilization is below the threshold, K is set to 1. As the link
utilization increases above the threshold, K is decreased as described above.
The simple solution for managing the information rate in such cases can result in
an unfair allocation of resources, as subscribers with a higher CIR actually receive
an IR lower than the CIR designated for subscribers in a lower CIR bracket.
A special algorithm for graceful degradation is incorporated into the AU, ensuring
that the degradation of performance for each individual Subscriber Unit is
proportional to its CIR.
The MIR/CIR algorithm uses buffers to control the flow of data. To balance the
performance over time, a special Burst Duration algorithm is employed to enable
higher transmission rates after a period of inactivity. If no data intended for a
certain SU (in the AU) or for the AU (in an SU) is received from the Ethernet port
during the last N seconds, the unit is allowed to transmit to this destination N
times its allowed IR value without any delay. For example, if the Burst Duration is
set to 0.5 second (or more), then after a period of inactivity of 0.5 seconds up to
128 Kbits x 0.5 = 64 Kbits may be transmitted to a unit whose IR is 128 Kbps,
without any delay (provided overall conditions in the wireless link allow this
burst).
4.2.6.6.2.1 MIR: Downlink (SU only)

Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU. The
MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value.
Available values range and default value are shown in Table 4-12.

The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128
(N*128).
4.2.6.6.2.2 MIR: Uplink (SU only)

Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the up-link from the SU to the AU. The
MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value.
(N*128).
4.2.6.6.2.3 CIR: Downlink (SU only)

Sets the Committed Information Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU. The
CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value.
(N*128).
4.2.6.6.2.4 CIR: Uplink (SU only)

Sets the Committed Information Rate of the uplink from the SU to the AU. The
CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value.
(N*128).
Table 4-12: MIR Ranges and Defaults
Unit MIR Uplink MIR Downlink

Type
Range (Kbps) Default (Kbps) Range (Kbps) Default (Kbps)
SU-1 128-896 896 128-1024 1024
SU-3 128-2,048 2,048 128-3,072 3,072
SU-6 128-4,096 4,096 128-6,016 6,016
SU-8 128-13,440 13,440 128-13,440 13,440
SU-54 128-53,888 53,888 128-53,888 53,888
SU-I 128-4,096 4,096 128-6,016 6,016
SU-V 128-8,064 8,064 128-2,048 2,048

Table 4-13: CIR Ranges and Defaults
Unit Type CIR Uplink CIR Downlink
Range (Kbps) Default (Kbps) Range (Kbps) Default (Kbps)

SU-1 0-896 0 0-1024 0
SU-3 0-2,048 0 0-2,048 0
SU-6 0-4,096 0 0-4,096 0
SU-8 0-11,264 0 0-11,264 0
SU-54 0-45,056 0 0-45,056 0
SU-I 0-4,096 0 0-6,016 0
SU-V 0-8,064 0 0-2,048 0
4.2.6.6.2.5 Maximum Burst Duration (SU and AU)

Sets the maximum time for accumulating burst transmission rights according to
the Burst Duration algorithm.
Available values range from 0 to 2000 (milliseconds).
The default value is 5 (milliseconds), enabling a maximum burst of (0.005 X CIR)

Kbps after a period of inactivity of 5 milliseconds or more.
4.2.6.6.2.6 Maximum Delay (SU only)

Sets the maximum permitted delay in the buffers system. As certain applications
are very sensitive to delay, if relatively high delays are permitted, these
applications may suffer from poor performance due to data accumulation in the
buffers from other applications, such as FTP. The Maximum Delay parameter
limits the number of available buffers. Data that is delayed more than the
permitted maximum delay is discarded. If the SU supports applications that are
very sensitive to delay, the value of the Maximum Delay should be decreased.
Valid values range from 300 to 10000 (milliseconds).
The default value is 5000 (milliseconds).
4.2.6.6.2.7 Graceful Degradation Limit (AU only)

Sets the limit on using the graceful degradation algorithm. In cases of over
demand, the performance of all SUs is degraded proportionally to their CIR
(IR=(100%-k%) x CIR). The graceful degradation algorithm is used as long as k ≥
K, where K is the Graceful Degradation Limit. Beyond this point the simple "brute
force" algorithm is used. The Graceful Degradation Limit should be raised in
proportion to the demand in the cell. The higher the expected demand in a cell,
the higher the value of the Graceful Degradation Limit. Higher demand can be
expected in cases of significant over subscription and/or in deployments where a

high number of subscribers are in locations without proper communication with

the AU at the highest data rate.
The available values range from 0 to 70 (%).
The default value is 70 (%).
4.2.6.6.2.8 MIR Only Option (AU only)

When the MIR Only Option is enabled, it forces the MIR/CIR algorithm to use MIR
values only. The MIR/CIR algorithm determines the actual information rate for
each of the supported SUs under changing conditions of demand, based on the
configured CIR and MIR values. When the MIR Only Option is enabled, the
MIR/CIR algorithm is overridden and forced to operate with MIR values only. For
example, the AU attempts to enable all SUs to transmit/receive information at the
specified MIR value. When enabled, the graceful degradation algorithm, which is a
part of the CIR/MIR algorithm, is also disabled.
4.2.6.6.2.9 MIR Threshold Percent (AU only)

Sets the threshold of wireless link utilization above which the MIR/CIR algorithm
is activated.
The range is from 0 to 100 (%).
The default is 50%.
4.2.6.6.2.10 Show MIR/CIR Parameters

Displays the current values of the MIR and CIR parameters.
4.2.6.6.3 Traffic Prioritization

Each packet that is received from the Ethernet port is placed in either the High or
Low queue, according to the Traffic Prioritization parameters. When the MIR/CIR
mechanism decides that a packet must be sent, the High priority queue will be
checked first. If the High priority queue is not empty, the first element in the
queue is forwarded to the MIR/CIR mechanism. Packets from the Low priority
queue will be forwarded only if the High queue is empty.
The prioritization of the packets is done using different classifiers:
VLAN Priority
ToS Priority: IP Precedence or DSCP
UDP and/or TCP ports

Each one of these classifiers can be activated/deactivated. If more than one

classifier is activated, the priority of each packet will be determined by the highest
priority given to it by the active classifiers.
The Traffic Prioritization menu enables activating/deactivating each of these

classifiers, and configuring the applicable parameters for each classifier.
The Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent parameter can be used to prevent
starvation of low priority traffic by ensuring that a certain number of low priority
packets is transmitted even at the expense of high priority traffic.
In addition, the Wireless Link Prioritization, which is a licensable feature, enables

to configure parameters that affect the prioritization of traffic in the wireless link
for packets with high/low priority from different units.
4.2.6.6.3.1 VLAN Priority Threshold

The VLAN Priority Threshold is applicable for Trunk and Hybrid Links only. It
enables defining the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold. If the VLAN Priority
field in a tagged frame is higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold
parameter, the packet will be routed to the High queue. If the VLAN Priority field is
lower than or equal to this value, the packet will be transferred to the Low queue
(unless it is assigned a High priority by another classifier).
The default value is 7, which means that all packets get a low priority (equivalent
to disabling the VLAN-based classifier).
4.2.6.6.3.2 ToS Prioritization

The ToS Prioritization parameters enable defining prioritization in accordance
with either the 3 IP Precedence bits in the IP header in accordance with RFC 791,
or the 6 DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) bits in accordance with RFC
2474. The ToS Prioritization menu includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.6.3.2.1 ToS Prioritization Option

The ToS Prioritization Option defines whether ToS-based prioritization is enabled
or disabled. The following options are available:
Disable
Enable IP Precedence (RFC791) Prioritization
Enable DSCP (RFC2474) Prioritization

4.2.6.6.3.2.2 IP Precedence Threshold

The IP Precedence Threshold parameter is applicable when the ToS Prioritization
Option is set to Enable IP Precedence (RFC791) Prioritization. If the value of the 3
IP Precedence bits in the IP header is higher than this threshold, the packet is
routed to the High queue. If the value is lower than or equal to this threshold, the
packet will be transferred to the Low queue (unless it is assigned a High priority
by another classifier).
4.2.6.6.3.2.3 DSCP Threshold

The DSCP Threshold parameter is applicable when the ToS Prioritization Option is
set to Enable DSCP (RFC2474) Prioritization. If the value of the 6 DSCP bits in the
IP header is higher than this threshold, the packet is routed to the High queue. If
the value is lower than or equal to this threshold, the packet will be routed to the
Low queue (unless it is assigned a High priority by another classifier).
4.2.6.6.3.3 UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization

The UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization parameters enable defining
prioritization in accordance with the UDP and/or TCP destination port ranges.
The UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization menu includes the following
parameters:
4.2.6.6.3.3.1 UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option

The UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option defines whether port ranges
based prioritization is enabled or disabled. The following options are available:
Disable
Enable Only for UDP
Enable Only for TCP
Enable for both UDP and TCP

4.2.6.6.3.3.2 UDP Port Ranges

The UDP Port Ranges menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority
classifiers when the UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option is set to either
Enable Only for UDP or Enable for both UDP and TCP. All packets whose
destination is included in the list will be routed to the High queue. All other
packets will be routed to the Low queue (unless they were assigned a High priority
The UDP Port Ranges menu includes the following options:
UDP RTP/RTCP Prioritization: Voice over IP is transported using Real Time

Protocol (RTP). The Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP) is used to control the
RTP. When an application uses RTP/RTCP, it chooses for destination ports
consecutive numbers: RTP port is always an even number, and the port with
the odd number following it will be assigned to RTCP.
If the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTP packets, then all the
packets with an odd numbered destination port will always have Low priority.
The packets with an even number for destination port will receive High
priority, if the port number is included in the specified ranges.
If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets, then all
packets whose destination port number is included is in the specified ranges
will receive High priority.
» RTP & RTCP
» RTP Only
The default is RTP & RTCP
Add UDP Port Ranges: This option enables adding UDP port ranges to the list
of priority port numbers. The list can include up to 64 ranges. It is possible to
add discrete port numbers and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to
separate between start and end port numbers. A comma is used to separate
between entries.
For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.

Delete UDP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting UDP port ranges from
the list of priority port numbers. It is possible to delete discrete port numbers
and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to separate between start and end
port numbers. A comma is used to separate between entries.
For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.
Delete All UDP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting all UDP port ranges
from the list of priority port numbers.
Show UDP Port Ranges: Select this option to view the current UDP RTP/RTCP
Prioritization option and the list of UDP Port Ranges.
4.2.6.6.3.3.3 TCP Port Ranges

The TCP Port Ranges menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority
classifiers when the UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option is set to either
Enable Only for TCP or Enable for both UDP and TCP. All packets whose
destination is included in the list will be routed to the High queue. All other
packets will be routed to the Low queue (unless they were assigned a High priority
The TCP Port Ranges menu includes the following options:
TCP RTP/RTCP Prioritization: Voice over IP is transported using Real Time

Protocol (RTP). The Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP) is used to control the
RTP. When an application uses RTP/RTCP, it chooses for destination ports
consecutive numbers: RTP port is always an even number, and the port with
the odd number following it will be assigned to RTCP.
If the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTP packets, then all the
packets with an odd numbered destination port will always have Low priority.
The packets with an even number for destination port will receive High
priority, if the port number is included in the specified ranges.
If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets, then all
packets whose destination port number is included in the specified ranges will
receive High priority.

» RTP & RTCP
» RTP Only
The default is RTP & RTCP
Add TCP Port Ranges: This option enables adding TCP port ranges to the list
of priority port numbers. The list can include up to 64 ranges. It is possible to
add discrete port numbers and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to
separate between start and end port numbers. A comma is used to separate
between entries. For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.
Delete TCP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting TCP port ranges from
the list of priority port numbers. It is possible to delete discrete port numbers
and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to separate between start and end
port numbers. A comma is used to separate between entries.
For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.
Delete All TCP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting all TCP port ranges
from the list of priority port numbers.
Show TCP Port Ranges: Select this option to view the current TCP RTP/RTCP
Prioritization option and the list of TCP Port Ranges.
4.2.6.6.3.4 Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent

This feature ensures that a certain amount of low priority packets, specified by
the Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent (LPTMP) parameter, is transmitted even
at the expense of high priority traffic.
The mechanism guarantees a low priority traffic with a rate of LPTMP * RT /100,
where RT symbolizes the allowed traffic rate. The high priority traffic will thus not
be able to exceed (100-LPTMP) * RT/100. If the system receives high priority traffic
at a rate higher than this figure, some high priority packets will be discarded.
The range is between 0 and 100 (%).
The default value is 0 (%).
4.2.6.6.3.5 Wireless Link Prioritization Parameters (AU)

To better support delay-sensitive and other high-priority traffic, a set of Wireless
Link Prioritization parameters enables configuring parameters that affect the

processes of gaining access to the wireless media and of transmitting high/low

priority packets.
The Wireless Link Prioritization feature is a licensed feature and is available only
in units with the suitable Feature License.
The time interval between two consecutive transmissions of frames is called

Inter-Frame Spacing (IFS). This is the time during which the unit determines
whether the medium is idle using the carrier sense mechanism. The IFS depends
on the type of the next frame to be transmitted, as follows:
SIFS (Short Inter-Frame Spacing) is used for certain frames that should be
transmitted immediately, such as ACK and CTS frames. The value of SIFS is
16 microseconds.
DIFS (Distributed coordination function Inter-Frame Spacing) is typically used

for other frame types when the medium is free. If the unit decides that the
medium is not free, it will defer transmission by DIFS plus a number of time
slots as determined by the Contention Window back-off algorithm after
reaching a decision that the medium has become free. DIFS equal SIFS plus
AIFS, where AIFS is a configurable number of time slots.
Under regular conditions, AIFS is configured to two time slots. To support

prioritization in the wireless link, we can configure a higher AIFS for low priority
traffic (AIFS of two time slots will always be used for high priority traffic as well as
AU's transmissions of broadcasts/multicasts and beacons). This will give
advantage to units that need to transmit high priority traffic (depending also on
the configured values for the Contention Window parameters).
Other parameters related to transmission to the wireless media that can be

configured separately for high/low priority packets are the Number of HW Retries
and Burst Duration.
Typically, a lower value of Number of HW Retries should be configured for traffic

such as VoIP, which on the one hand is sensitive to delays and on the other hand
is less sensitive to missing packets than data traffic.
The Burst Duration, which defines the maximum duration of a burst, should be
set to a lower value for delay sensitive traffic. Typically the Burst Duration of the
AU should be set to higher value than that of the SUs, because of the higher
number of packets that should be transmitted by the AU.
When the Wireless Link Prioritization feature is enabled, the following parameters
are not applicable:

Arbitration Inter-Frame Spacing (AIFS)
Number of HW Retries
Burst Mode Option
Burst Mode Time Interval
When an SU with a SW version below 4.0 tries to associate with an AU that has
the Wireless Link Prioritization feature enable, the AU will generate a trap that will
include information about this SU. In this way the system administrator can be
alerted that the SU should be upgraded. This is necessary because otherwise an
SU that does not support the Wireless Link Prioritization feature will send all the
traffic as high priority.
CAUTION
Verify that all SUs served by an AU with the Wireless Link Prioritization Option enabled use a SW
version that supports this feature (SW version 4.0 and higher). Otherwise, overall performance and
quality of service in the cell may be reduced since all data from an SU with SW version below 4.0
will be sent with high priority.
The Wireless Link Prioritization Parameters menu includes the following:
4.2.6.6.3.5.1 Wireless Link Prioritization Option

The Wireless Link Prioritization Option enables or disables the Wireless Link
Prioritization feature.
The default option is Disable.
4.2.6.6.3.5.2 Low Priority AIFS

The Low Priority AIFS defines the AIFS number of time slots that will be used by
the AU and the SUs served by it for low priority traffic.
The range is from 3 to 50 (time slots).
The default is 3.
4.2.6.6.3.5.3 Number of HW Retries for High Priority Traffic

The Number of HW Retries for High Priority Traffic defines the maximum number
of times that an unacknowledged high priority unicast packet can be
retransmitted. This is the value that will be used by the AU and by the SUs served
with it.
The range is from 1 to 14 times.
The default is 10 times.

4.2.6.6.3.5.4 Number of HW Retries for Low Priority Traffic

The Number of HW Retries for Low Priority Traffic defines the maximum number
of times that an unacknowledged low priority unicast packet can be
retransmitted. This is the value that will be used by the AU and by the SUs served
with it.
The range is from 1 to 14 times.
The default is 10 times.
4.2.6.6.3.5.5 AU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic

The AU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum
duration of a burst that can be made by the AU for high priority packets.
The measurement unit is 250 microseconds and the range is from 1 to 40 (0.25 to
10 milliseconds) or 0 to disable bursts for high priority packets.
The default is 16 (4 milliseconds).
4.2.6.6.3.5.6 AU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic

The AU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum
duration of a burst that can be made by the AU for low priority packets.
10 milliseconds) or 0 to disable bursts for low priority packets.
4.2.6.6.3.5.7 SU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic

The SU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum
duration of a burst that can be made by the SUs served by the AU for high priority
packets.
10 milliseconds) or 0 to disable bursts for high priority packets.
4.2.6.6.3.5.8 SU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic

The SU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum
duration of a burst that can be made by the SUs served by the AU for low priority
packets.
10 milliseconds) or 0 to disable bursts for low priority packets.

4.2.6.6.4 DRAP Parameters (AU only)

DRAP (Dynamic Resources Allocation Protocol is a protocol that can be used by
the AU to communicate with Voice and Networking Gateways connected to SUs
served by it, enabling identification of these Gateways. It also enables managing
voice calls made by Voice Gateways (VG).
The AU keeps track of all current voice calls and, upon receiving from a VG a
request for a new call, compares the current number of calls to the maximum
allowed number. If the maximum allowed number has been reached, the AU will
not confirm the request.
The DRAP feature is applicable only for gateways that support DRAP.
The following is a description of DRAP-related parameters:
4.2.6.6.4.1 DRAP Support

The DRAP Support option enables or disables the DRAP feature that offers the
possibility of identifying the connected Gateways and limiting the maximum
number of voice calls made by Voice Gateways in a cell.
The default option is Enable.
4.2.6.6.4.2 UDP Port

The UDP Port parameter defines the UDP port used by the DRAP protocol.
The range is from 8000 to 8200.
4.2.6.6.4.3 Maximum Number of Voice Calls

The Maximum Number of Voice Calls parameter sets the maximum number of
active calls in the cell.
The range is between 0 and 255.
4.2.6.6.4.4 DRAP TTL

The DRAP TTL parameter sets the time between two consecutive Allocation
Requests from the Gateways. The Allocation requests are used to identify the
existence of an active Gateway. In Voice Gateways they also include information
about the current number of voice calls and requests for new calls.
The range is between 1 and 255 (seconds).
The default value is 10 (seconds).
4.2.6.6.4.5 Number of Active Voice Calls

This option shows the current number of active voice calls in the cell.

4.2.6.6.5 Show Service Parameters

Displays the current values of the Service Parameters.
4.2.6.7 Security Parameters

BreezeACCESS VL systems can support encryption of authentication messages
and/or data frames using one of the following encryption standards:
WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy algorithm. WEP is defined in the IEEE 802.11
Wireless LAN standard and is based on the RSA's RC4 encryption algorithm.
AES OCB Advanced Encryption Standard. AES is defined by the National

Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) and is based on Rijndael block
cipher. AES OCB (Offset Code Book) is a mode that operates by augmenting
the normal encryption process by incorporating an offset value.
FIPS 197 is certified for compliance with Federal Information Processing

Standards. It provides encryption and message integrity in one solution and
implements the Advanced Encryption Standard using Rijndael block cipher.
NOTE
FIPS 197 can be supported only in Access Units with HW revision C or higher. FIPS 197 feature
license is not available for AUS units.
The following parameters are available through the Security Parameters menu (in
certain units some or all of the security options may not be available):
Authentication Algorithm
Data Encryption Option
Security Mode
Default Key (SU only)
Default Multicast Key (AU only)
Key # 1 to Key # 4
Promiscuous Authentication (AU only)

4.2.6.7.1 Authentication Algorithm

The Authentication Algorithm option determines the operation mode of the
selected unit. The following two options are available:
Open System: An SU configured to Open System can only associate with an

AU also configured to Open System. In this case, the authentication
encryption algorithm is not used.
Shared Key: The authentication messages are encrypted. An SU configured to

use a Shared Key can only be authenticated by an AU configured to use a
Shared Key, provided the applicable Key (which means both the key number
and its content) in the AU is identical to the key selected as the Default Key in
the SU.
The default is Open System.
NOTE
The Shared Key option cannot be selected before at least one Key is defined. In the SU, a Default
Key that refers to a valid Key must be selected.
The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Authentication Algorithm option.
Mixed operation is not supported.
4.2.6.7.2 Data Encryption Option

The Data Encryption Option allows enabling or disabling data encryption. When
enabled, all data frames, including frames using management protocols such as
Telnet, FTP, TFTP, SNMP, DHCP and ICMP, are encrypted.
NOTE
The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Data Encryption Option.
Mixed operation is not supported.
A unit with Data Encryption Option enabled can accept non-encrypted data frames.
The Maximum Number of Associations must be set to a value of 124 or lower to enable Data
Encryption. As long as Data Encryption is enabled, the Maximum Number of Associations
cannot be set to a value higher than 124.The Maximum Number of Associations Limit (512
when Data Encryption is disabled, 124 when Data Encryption is enabled) is indicated in the
Show Air Interface Parameters display.
4.2.6.7.3 Security Mode

The Security Mode option enables selecting the algorithm to be used for
encrypting the authentication messages and/or data frames.

The available options are WEP, AES OCB and FIPS 197 (if available).
The default is WEP.
4.2.6.7.4 Default Key (SU only)

The Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting/decrypting the
authentication messages (Shared Key mode) and/or data frames (Data Encryption
enabled). The AU learns the Default Key from the SU provided it is one of the Keys
defined in the AU. The AU may use different keys when authenticating and/or
communicating with different SUs.
Available values range from 1 to 4.
The default is KEY # 1.
4.2.6.7.5 Default Multicast Key (AU only)

The Multicast Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting multicasts
and broadcasts when Data Encryption is enabled.
Available values range from 1 to 4.
The default is KEY # 1.
4.2.6.7.6 Key # 1 to Key # 4

The Key # options enables defining the encryption key to be used for initializing
the pseudo-random number generator that forms part of the
encryption/decryption process. The Keys must be set before the Shared Key
authentication algorithm or Data Encryption can be used. To support proper
operation, both the Key # and the content must be identical at both sides of a
wireless link.
Each Key is a string of 32 hexadecimal numbers. For security reasons, it is a

"write only" parameter, displayed as a string of asterisks ("*").
The default for all 4 Keys is 000…0 (a string of 32 zeros), which means no key.
4.2.6.7.7 Promiscuous Authentication (AU only)

The Promiscuous Authentication mode enables new SUs to join an active cell
where Shared Key operation and/or Data Encryption are used, even if this SU
does not have the correct security parameters. In promiscuous mode, all downlink
transmissions (from AU to SUs) are not encrypted, allowing remote configuration
of security parameters, regardless of the current settings in the SUs of the
parameters related to data encryption. After a new SU joins the cell it should be
remotely configured with the proper parameters (or upgraded). When the SU is
configured properly, the Promiscuous Mode should be disabled.

NOTE
Promiscuous Authentication is currently available only for VL SUs. SU-EZ units cannot join an
AU-VL cell in Promisuous Mode.
NOTE
Do not leave the AU in the enabled Promiscuous Authentication mode for prolonged periods. Use it
only when absolutely necessary, perform the required actions as quickly as possible and disable it.
The unit will return automatically to Promiscuous Authentication disabled mode after reset.
4.2.6.8 Country Code Parameters

4.2.6.8.1 Country Code Select
The Country Code Select option enables changing the Country Code used by the
unit. In the current release this option is applicable only to units in the 5.4 and
5.8 GHz bands.
The default Country Code is set in factory according to the destination country.
CAUTION
The selected Country Code must comply with applicable local radio regulations.
4.2.6.8.2 Re-apply Country Code Values

After loading a new SW version with any changes in the relevant Country Code,
the Re-apply Country Code Values option must be activated for the changes to
take effect. Following activation of this feature, the unit must be reset to fully
apply the changes.
NOTE
Following activation of the Re-apply Country Code Values option, all parameters that are affected
by the Country Code (frequency parameters, transmit power parameters, DFS operation,
modulation level parameters, burst mode parameters) revert to their factory default values and must
be re-configured.

Appendix A
Software Version Loading Using
TFTP
Appendix A - Software Version Loading Using TFTP
Firmware upgrades to the unit's FLASH memory can be performed by a simple

loading procedure using a TFTP application. Before performing an upgrade
procedure, be sure you have the correct files and most recent instructions.
Upgrade packages can be obtained from the Technical Support section of

Alvarion's web site, http://www.alvarion.com/.
CAUTION
Shutting down power to the unit before completion of the loading procedure may cause the unit to
be inoperable.
To load software versions:
1 Verify that IP connectivity to the required unit is established.
2 Ensure that the IP address of the PC from which the upgrade is to be

performed belongs to the same subnet as the unit to be upgraded, unless the
unit is behind a router. If the unit is behind a router, verify that the unit is
configured with the correct Default Gateway Address.
3 To view the current IP parameters of the unit, use the Monitor program by
connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet. To access the IP
parameters via the Monitor program:
a From the Main Menu select 1 - Info Screens.
b From the Info Screen menu select 2 - Show Basic Configuration. The
current basic configuration is displayed, including the run time values for
the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Address parameters.
4 To modify any of the IP parameters:
a From the Main Menu, select 3 - Basic Configuration.
b To configure the IP address, select: 1 - IP Address.
c To configure the subnet mask, select 2 - Subnet Mask.
d To configure the default gateway address, select 3 - Default Gateway

Address.
e Reset the unit to apply the new IP parameters.
5 To verify the connection, PING the unit's IP address and verify that PING
replies are being received.

6 Use the TFTP utility, with the following syntax, to perform the upgrade:
tftp -i hostaddress put sourcefile [destinationfile]
where -i is for binary mode and hostaddress is the IP address of the unit to be
upgraded. put causes the PC client to send a file to the hostaddress.
7 The original sourcefile name of SW files is in the structure uX_Y_Z.bz, where u

is the unit type (a for AU, s for SU) and X.Y.Z is the version number.
8 destinationfile is the name of the file to be loaded. Use the SNMP write
community <SnmpWriteCommunity>.bz to define the destination filename.
The default SNMP write community is private. For example, to load the
upgrade file a5_0_13.bz to an AU whose IP address is 206.25.63.65: tftp -i
206.25.63.65 put a5_0_13.bz private.bz
9 When the loading is complete, the following message is displayed, indicating

completion of the TFTP process:
Download operation has been completed successfully
10 The unit decompresses the loaded file and checks the integrity of the new
version. The new version replaces the previous shadow version only after
verification. If verification tests fail, the loaded version will be rejected. Among
other things that are tested, the unit will reject a file if either the file name or
the version number matches the current Main versions. The unit will also
reject a file designated for a different unit type, e.g. an AU upgrade file with the
prefix a in the original file name will not be accepted by SUs.
11 The FLASH memory can store two software versions. One version is called
Main and the second version is called Shadow. The new version is loaded into
the Shadow (backup) FLASH memory. To check that the new firmware was
properly downloaded and verified, view the firmware versions stored in the
FLASH, as follows:
a From the Main Menu, select 2 - Unit Control.
b From the Unit Control menu, select 5 - Flash Memory Control.
c From the Flash Memory Control menu, select S - Show Flash Versions.
The following information is displayed:
Flash Versions
============
Running from :Main Version

Main Version File Name :4_5_16.bz

Main Version Number :4.5.16
Shadow Version File Name :5_0_13.bz
Shadow Version Number :5.0.13
NOTE
After loading a new SW version with any changes in the relevant Country Code, these changes
must be applied by activation the Re-apply Country Code Values option in the Unit Control Menu.
Note that following activation of the Re-apply Country Code Values option, all parameters that are
affected by the Country Code (frequency parameters, transmit power parameters, DFS operation,
modulation level parameters, burst mode parameters) revert to their factory default values and must
be re-configured.

Appendix B
File Download and Upload Using
TFTP
Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP
The File Download/Upload feature simplifies the task of remotely configuring a

large number of units using TFTP protocol. By downloading the configuration file
to a PC it is possible to view all the parameters configured for the unit, as a plain
ASCII text file. It is necessary to edit the file using a simple editor and remove
certain parameters or change their values prior to uploading the configuration to
another unit. The file loading procedure can also be used for uploading a feature
license file or an updated country code file to multiple units.
When multiple configurations are being done simultaneously, that is, the file is
being uploaded to several units, it is recommended that the file will include only
the required parameters.
In the configuration file, the following three fields represent each parameter:
1 A symbolic string similar to the name of the parameter in the Monitor

program, followed by "=".
2 The value of the parameters, which uses the same values as the Monitor
program.
3 An optional comment. If used, the comment should start with a ";" character.
An unknown parameter or a known parameter with a value that is invalid or out

of range will be ignored.
Use the SNMP write community string (the default is "private") to define both the
uploaded file (put) and the downloaded file (get). The file should be transferred in
ASCII mode.
Use the extension cfg for a configuration file.
Use the extension cmr for the Operator Defaults file.
Use the extension fln for a Feature License file.
Use the extension ccf for a Country Code file.
Feature license and country code files include multiple strings, where each string
is applicable only for a certain unit identified by its MAC address. When uploading
a feature license or a country code file to multiple units, each unit will accept only
the parts that are applicable for itself.
Examples:
1 To upload the configuration file using a DOS based TFTP Client to an SU

whose IP address is 206.25.63.65, enter:
tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.cfg

Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP
2 To download the Operator Defaults file from the same unit, enter:
tftp 206.25.63.65 get private.cmr Suconf
3 To upload the Feature Upgrade file to the same unit, enter:

tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.fln
4 To upload the Country Code file from to same unit, enter:

tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.ccf
NOTE
The Configuration File mechanism is common to BreezeACCESSVL and BreezeNET B products.

The Configuration File includes also parameters that are applicable only to BreezeNET B products.
Do not attempt to change the default values of these parameters.

Appendix C
Using the Set Factory Defaults
Utility
Appendix C - Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility
The Set Factory Defaults utility is intended to enable management access to a

unit in cases where such access is not possible due to wrong or unknown
configuration of certain parameters. This includes cases such as unknown
Management VLAN ID and wrong management access filtering.
The utility accesses the unit by sending a special packet. Access to the unit is
based on its MAC address, which must be entered in the Unit MAC address field.
The set unit defaults feature is only available via the Ethernet port.
To set factory defaults:
1 Connect the PC with the Set Factory Defaults utility to the Ethernet port of the
unit.
2 Enter the unit's MAC address.
3 Click on the Set button.
This utility performs the same operation as Set Complete Factory Defaults,
restoring the default factory configuration of all parameters, except to Passwords,
general FTP parameters and AU's Frequency.

Appendix D
Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor
SU Cable
Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable
The Indoor-to-Outdoor cable provides pin-to-pin connection on both ends.
Figure D-1 shows the wire pair connections required for the Indoor-to-Outdoor
cable.
Figure D-1: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments
The color codes used in cables that are supplied with crimped connectors are as
listed in the following table:
Table D-1: Cable Color Codes
Wire color Pin

Blue 1
Blue/white 2
Orange 3
Orange/white 6
Brown 4
Brown/white 5
Green 7
Green/white 8
Use a crimp tool for RJ-45 connectors to prepare the wires, insert them into the
appropriate pins and use the crimp tool to crimp the connector. Make sure to do
the following:

Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable
1 Remove as small a length as possible of the external jacket. Verify that the
external jacket is well inside the service box to ensure good sealing.
2 Take back the shield drain wire before inserting the cable into the RJ-45
connector, to ensure a good connection with the connector's shield after
crimping.

Appendix E
Parameters Summary
Appendix E - Parameters Summary
In This Appendix:
The tables provide an at a glance summary of the configurable parameters, value
ranges, and default values. In addition, each parameter entry also includes an
indication as to whether the parameter is updated in run-time or whether the unit
must be reset before the modification takes effect ("No" in the Run-Time column
indicates that a change to the parameter will take effect only after reset).

Appendix E - Parameters Summary Parameters Summary
E.1 Parameters Summary
E.1.1 Unit Control Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time

Change Unit Name AU, SU Up to 32 printable ASCII characters None Yes
Change Read Only AU, SU Up to 8 printable ASCII characters public No

Password
Change Installer AU, SU Up to 8 printable ASCII characters user No

Password
Change Administrator AU, SU Up to 8 printable ASCII characters private No

Password
FTP SW Version File AU, SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An VxWorks.bz Yes

Name empty string is not allowed.
Configuration File Name AU, SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An config.cfg Yes

empty string is not allowed.
Operator Defaults File AU, SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An operator.cmr Yes

Name empty string is not allowed.
FTP Source Dir AU, SU Up to 80 printable ASCII characters. Use None (empty) Yes
"." to clear.
FTP Server IP Address AU, SU IP address 10.0.0.253 Yes
FTP Gateway IP Address AU, SU IP address 0.0.0.0 Yes
FTP User Name AU, SU Up to 18 printable ASCII characters vx Yes
FTP Password AU, SU Up to 18 printable ASCII characters vx Yes
FTP Log File Name AU, SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters logfile.log Yes
FTP Log File Destination AU, SU Up to 80 printable ASCII characters. Use None (empty) Yes
Directory "." to clear.
Event Log Policy AU, SU Message Warning Yes
Warning
Error
Fatal
Log None
Log Out Timer AU, SU 1 999 minutes 5 Yes


Ethernet Port Negotiation AU, SU Force 10 Mbps and Half-Duplex Auto No
Mode Negotiation
Auto Negotiation
Change System Location AU, SU Up to 34 printable ASCII characters None Yes
Manual Feature Upgrade AU, SU License string: 32 to 64 hexadecimal None No

digits
E.1.2 IP Parameters

IP Address AU, SU IP address 10.0.0.1 No
Subnet Mask AU, SU IP address 255.0.0.0 No
Default Gateway Address AU, SU IP address 0.0.0.0 No
DHCP Option AU, SU Disable Disable No
DHCP Only
Automatic
Access to DHCP AU, SU From Wireless Only AU: From No
Ethernet Only
From Ethernet Only
SU: From
From Both Wireless and Ethernet Wireless Only
E.1.3 Air Interface Parameters

ESSID AU, SU Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID1 No
characters
Operator ESSID Option AU Disable Enable No
Enable
Operator ESSID AU Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID1 No
characters


Hidden ESSID Option AU Disable Disable No
Enable
Hidden ESSID Support SU Disable Disable No
Enable
Hidden ESSID Timeout SU 1 - 60 (minutes) 10 (minutes) Yes
Best AU Support SU Disable Disable No
Enable
Number of Scanning SU 1 - 255 4 No
Attempts
Preferred AU MAC SU MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00 No

Address
(no preferred AU)
Scanning Mode SU Passive, Active Passive No
Cell Distance Mode AU Automatic, Manual Automatic No
Maximum Cell Distance AU 0-54 (Km) 0 (no compensation) Yes
0 means no compensation
Fairness Factor AU 0 - 100 (%) 100 (%) No
Per SU Distance AU Disable Disable Yes

Learning
Enable
Arbitration Inter-Frame AU, SU 1-50 (time slots) 2 time slots No
Spacing
Wireless Trap Threshold AU 1-100 (%) 30 (%) No
Maximum Number of AU AU-BS, AU-SA: 1-512 (1 124 if AU-BS, AU-SA: 512 Yes
Associations Data Encryption Option is
AUS-BS, AUS-SA: 8
enabled).
AUS-BS, AUS-SA: 1-8
Sub-Band Select* AU According to the Country Code 1 Yes
Frequency AU According to the Sub-Band The lowest frequency Yes

in the Sub-Band
User Defined Frequency SU All frequencies in the available All available Yes
Subsets Sub Bands frequencies in all
available Sub Bands


DFS Required by AU No Dependent on Country Yes
Regulations ** Code
Yes
Frequency Subset AU According to the Sub-Band. A A Yes
Definition (in AU)** list of frequency indexes or A
for all frequencies supported by
the Sub-Band
Channel Check Time** AU 1 - 3600 (seconds) 60 (seconds) Yes
Channel Avoidance AU 1 - 60 (minutes) 30 (minutes) Yes

Period**
SU Waiting Option** AU Disable Enable Yes
Enable
Minimum Pulses to AU 1-100 4 for FCC Yes
Detect**
8 for other (ETSI)
Channel Reuse Option** AU Disable Disable Yes
Enable
Radar Activity AU 1 - 12 hours 5 hours Yes
Assessment Period**
Maximum Number of AU 1 - 10 detections 5 detections Yes

Detections in
Assessment Period**
DFS Detection Algorithm AU Applicable only for Universal ETSI Yes

Country Code in 5.4/5.8 GHz:
ETSI
FCC
Clear radar Detected AU Disable Disable Yes
Channels After Reset**
Enable
Country Code Learning AU Disable Disable Yes
by SU
Enable
Transmit Power AU, SU -10 dBm to a value that The highest allowed Yes
depends on HW revision , value
Country Code / Antenna Gain
and (in SU) the Max Tx Power
parameter


Maximum Tx Power SU -10 dBm to a value that The highest allowed Yes
depends on HW revision and value
Country Code / Antenna Gain
ATPC Option AU, SU Disable Enable Yes
Enable
ATPC Option for EZ AU Disable Disable Yes
Enable
Delta from Minimum AU 4-20 (dB) Units in 5.4, 5.8 Yes
SNR Level GHz bands: 5 (dB)
Units in the 4.9, 5.2

and 5.3 GHz
bands: 8 (dB)
Minimum SNR Level AU 4-60 (dB) 28 (dB) Yes
Minimum Interval AU 1-3600 (seconds) 30 (seconds) Yes

Between ATPC
Messages
ATPC Power Level AU 1-20 (dB) 4 Yes

Steps
Tx Control AU Off On Yes
On
Ethernet Status Control

Antenna Gain AU, Minimum: 0 (dBi) According to the No
SU*** antenna supplied with
Maximum: 50 or Regulation
the unit.
Max EIRP+10 (the lower of the
two values).
Spectrum Analysis AU, SU 2 - 30 seconds 5 seconds Yes

Channel Scan Period
(Configured
per analysis)
Spectrum Analysis Scan AU, SU 1 - 100 cycles 2 cycles Yes

Cycles
(Configured
per analysis)
Automatic Channel AU Disable Disable Yes

Selection
Enable


Lost Beacons Watchdog AU 100 - 1000, 0 means Not Used 218 Yes
Threshold
Noise Immunity State AU, SU Automatic Automatic Yes

Control
Manual
Noise Immunity Level AU, SU 0-4 0 Yes
Use only 0 or 4
Spur Immunity Level AU, SU 0-7 0 Yes
OFDM Weak Signal AU, SU 0 (not active) or 1 (active) 0 Yes
Pulse Detection AU, SU Low Low Yes

Sensitivity
High
Noise Floor Calculation AU, SU Fully Automatic Fully Automatic Yes
Mode
Forced
Automatic with Minimum

Value
Noise Floor Forced AU, SU -107 to -55 (dBm) 5 MHz bandwidth: -102 Yes
Value
10 MHz bandwidth: -99
20 MHz bandwidth: -96
Select Calibration AU, SU None None Yes

Option to Use
Field
Factory (not available in

current release)
* Not applicable if only one Sub-Band is available for the applicable Country Code
** Applicable only if DFS is supported by the Sub-Band
*** Configurable only in units without an integral antenna.
E.1.4 Network Management Parameters

Access to Network AU, SU From Wireless Link Only From Both No
Management Ethernet and
From Ethernet Only Wireless Link
From Both Ethernet and Wireless

Link


Network Management AU, SU Disable Disable No
Filtering
Activate Management IP Filter On
Ethernet Port

Wireless Port

Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports
Set Network AU, SU IP address 0.0.0.0 No

Management IP Address (all 10 entries)
Set/Change Network AU, SU <start address> to <end address> 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 No

Management IP Address or, (all 10 entries)
Ranges <base address> mask <mask>
Send SNMP Traps AU Disable Disable Yes
Enable
SNPM Traps IP AU IP address 0.0.0.0 No
Destination (all 10 entries)
SNMP Traps Community AU Up to 14 printable ASCII characters public No

(all 10 entries)
Wi2 IP Address SU IP address 0.0.0.0 (none) Yes
E.1.5 Bridge Parameters

VLAN ID Data SU 1 - 4094 1 No
VLAN ID - Management AU, SU 1 - 4094, 65535 65535 (no VLAN) No
VLAN Link Type AU, SU Hybrid Link Hybrid Link No
Trunk Link
Access Link (only in SU)
Service Provider Link

VLAN Forwarding AU, SU Disable, Enable Disable No
Support
VLAN Forwarding ID AU, SU 1 - 4094 Empty list No

(up to 20 entries)
VLAN Relaying Support AU Disable, Enable Disable No


VLAN Relaying ID AU 1 - 4094 Empty list No
(up to 20 entries)
VLAN Priority - Data SU 0-7 0 No
VLAN Priority - AU, SU 0-7 0 No

Management
VLAN QinQ Protocol AU, SU 8100 - 9000, 9100, 9200 (hex) 8100 (hex) No
Ethertype
Service Provider VLAN SU 1 - 4094 1 No

ID
Ethernet Broadcast SU Disable, Disable Yes

Filtering Options
On Ethernet Port Only
On Wireless Port Only
On Both Wireless and Ethernet

Ports
DHCP Broadcast SU Disable Disable Yes

Override Filter
Enable
PPPoE Broadcast SU Disable Disable Yes
Override Filter
Enable
ARP Broadcast Override SU Disable Enable Yes
Filter
Enable
Ethernet AU, SU Disable Disable Yes
Broadcast/Multicast
Limiter Option Limit only Broadcast Packets
Limit Multicast Packets that are not

Broadcasts
Limit All Multicast Packets

(including broadcast)
Ethernet AU, SU 0 - 204800 (packets/second) 50 Yes

Broadcast/Multicast
Limiter Threshold
Ethernet AU, SU 1 - 60 (minutes) 5 (minutes) Yes

Broadcast/Multicast
Limiter Send Trap
Interval


Bridge Aging Time AU, SU 20 - 2000 seconds 300 No
Broadcast/Multicast AU Disable Broadcast/Multica No

Relaying st Enable
Broadcast/Multicast Enable
Broadcast Enable
Multicast Enable
Unicast Relaying AU Disable Enable No
Enable
MAC Address List AU Up to 100 MAC addresses None (empty) Yes
MAC Address List Action AU Deny Deny Yes
Allow
Station Allowed Option Disable Enable Yes
Enable
Roaming Option SU Disable Disable No
Enable
Ethernet Port Control SU Disable Enable Yes
Enable
E.1.6 Performance Parameters

RTS Threshold AU, SU HW Revision C or higer: 20-4092 AU HW Revision Yes
(bytes) A, B: 2200
HW Revision A, B: 20-2200. AU HW Revision C

or higher (except
in the 900 MHz
band): 4092
AU in the 900 MHz

band: 60
SU: 60
Minimum Contention AU, SU 0, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 15 No
Window 1023


Maximum Contention AU, SU 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023 1023 No
Window
Maximum Modulation AU, SU According to the Min/Max The highest available Yes
Level Modulation Level defined for the value
Sub-Band
Multicast Modulation AU According to the Min/Max The lowest available Yes

Level Modulation Level defined for the value
Sub-Band
Number of HW Retries AU, SU 1 - 14 10 Yes
Average SNR Memory AU, SU -1 to 32 5 Yes

Factor
Burst Mode Option* AU, SU Disable Enable No
Enable
Burst Mode Time AU, SU 1 to the value defined in the 5 milliseconds or the Yes
Interval* Sub-Band for Maximum Burst value of Maximum
Duration (milliseconds) Burst Duration defined
for the Sub-Band (the
lower of the two
values).
Adaptive Modulation AU, SU Disable Enable No

Option
Enable
Minimum Interval AU, SU 1-3600 (seconds) 4 (seconds) Yes
Between Adaptive
Modulation Messages
Adaptive Modulation AU, SU Normal Normal No

Decisión Threshold
High
Concatenation Option AU, SU Disable Enable No
Enable
Maximum Concatenated AU, SU 256 to 2200 bytes for units with 2200 for units with Yes
Frame Size HW revision A or B rev A or B
256 to 4032 bytes for units with 4032 for units with
HW revision C or higher rev C or higher
* Applicable only if Burst Mode is supported by the Sub-Band.

E.1.7 Service Parameters

User Filtering Option SU Disable Disable Yes
IP Protocol Only
User Defined Addresses Only
PPPoE Protocol Only

Set/Change Filter IP SU <start address> to <end address> 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 No
Address Ranges or, (all 8 entries)
<base address> mask <mask>
DHCP Unicast Override SU Disable DHCP Unicast Disable DHCP Yes

Filter Unicast
Enable DHCP Unicast
MIR: Downlink SU SU-1: 128-1024 (Kbps) SU-1: 1024 Yes
SU-3: 128-3072 (Kbps) SU-3: 3072
SU-6: 128-6016 (Kbps) SU-6: 6016
SU-8: 128-13440 (Kbps) SU-8: 13440
SU-54: 128-53888 (Kbps) SU-54: 53888
SU-I: 128-6016 (Kbps) SU-I: 6016
SU-V:128-2048 (Kbps) SU-V:2048
MIR: Uplink SU SU-1: 128-896 (Kbps) SU-1: 896 Yes

SU-3: 128-2048 (Kbps) SU-3: 2048
SU-6: 128-4096 (Kbps) SU-6: 4096
SU-8: 128-13440 (Kbps) SU-8: 13440
SU-54: 128-53888 (Kbps) SU-54: 53888
SU-I: 128-4096 (Kbps) SU-I: 4096
SU-V: 128-8064 (Kbps) SU-V: 8064
CIR: Downlink SU SU-1: 0-1024 (Kbps) 0 (Kbps) Yes

SU-3: 0-2048 (Kbps)
SU-6: 0-4096 (Kbps)
SU-8: 0-11264 (Kbps)
SU-54: 0-45056 (Kbps)
SU-I: 0-6016 (Kbps)
SU-V: 0-2048 (Kbps)
CIR: Uplink SU SU-1: 0-896 (Kbps) 0 (Kbps) Yes

SU-3: 0-2048 (Kbps)
SU-6: 0-4096 (Kbps)
SU-8: 0-11264 (Kbps)
SU-54: 0-45056 (Kbps)
SU-I: 0-4096 (Kbps)
SU-V: 0-8064 (Kbps)


Maximum Delay SU 300 - 10,000 (ms) 5,000 (ms) Yes
Maximum Burst Duration AU, SU 0 - 2,000 (ms) 5 (ms) No
Graceful Degradation AU 0 - 70 (%) 70 (%) No

Limit
MIR Only Option AU Disable Enable No
Enable
MIR Threshold Percent AU 0 - 100 (%) 50 (%) Yes
VLAN Priority Threshold AU, SU 0-7 7 No
ToS Prioritization Option AU, SU Disable Disable No
Enable IP Precedence (RFC791)

Prioritization
Enable DSCP (RFC2474)

Prioritization
IP Precedence Threshold AU, SU 0-7 4 No
DSCP Threshold AU, SU 0 - 63 32 No
UDP/TCP Port Ranges AU, SU Disable Disable No

Prioritization Option
Enable Only for UDP
Enable Only for TCP
Enable for both UDP and TCP

UDP RTP/RTCP AU, SU RTP & RTCP RTP & RTCP No
Prioritization
RTP Only
TCP RTP/RTCP AU, SU RTP & RTCP RTP & RTCP No
Prioritization
RTP Only
Low Priority Traffic AU, SU 0 - 100 (%) 0 (%) Yes
Minimum Percent
Wireless Link AU Disable Disable Yes

Prioritization Option*
Enable
Low Priority AIFS* AU 3-50 3 Yes
Number of HW Retries AU 1-14 10 Yes

for High Priority Traffic*


Number of HW Retries AU 1-14 10 Yes
for Low Priority Traffic*
AU Burst Duration for AU 0-40 (in 0.25 milliseconds units) 16 (4 Yes

High Priority Traffic* milliseconds)
AU Burst Duration for AU 0-40 (in 0.25 milliseconds units) 20 (5 Yes

Low Priority Traffic* milliseconds)
SU Burst Duration for AU 0-40 (in 0.25 milliseconds units) 8 (2 milliseconds) Yes
High Priority Traffic*
SU Burst Duration for AU 0-40 (in 0.25 milliseconds units) 20 (5 Yes

Low Priority Traffic* milliseconds)
DRAP Support AU Disable Enable No
Enable
UDP Port AU 8000-8200 8171 No
Maximum Number Of AU 1-255 40 No

Voice Calls
DRAP TTL AU 1-255 (seconds) 10 (seconds) No
* Wireless Link Prioritization parameters are applicable only for units with a license for this feature
E.1.8 Security Parameters

Authentication Algorithm* AU, SU Open system Open system No
Shared Key
Data Encryption Option* AU, SU Disable Disable No
Enable
Security Mode* AU, SU WEP WEP No
AES OCB
FIPS-197
Default Key SU 1-4 1 No
Default Multicast Key AU 1-4 1 No
Key # 1 to Key # 4 AU, SU 32 hexadecimal digits 0…0 (all 0=no key) No


Promiscuous AU Disable Disable Yes
Authentication (Disable
Enable after reset)
* Applicable only if supported by the Sub-Band.

Appendix F
Troubleshooting
Appendix F - Troubleshooting Ethernet Port Connection Problems
F.2 Ethernet Port Connection Problems
Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action

The Ethernet Integrity Indicator (the Wrong type of Ethernet If connected directly to PC-use a crossed
yellow LED embedded in the Ethernet cable cable. Otherwise-use a straight cable
connector) is off, and/or the Ethernet
Faulty Ethernet cable Replace cable
Activity Indicator (the green embedded
LED) does not blink when there should
be traffic on the Ethernet port.
The unit does not respond to ping. Wrong IP configuration Make sure that the PC is on the same
subnet as the unit*.
Wrong Ethernet port Make sure that the speed and duplex
operation mode settings in the PC match the configuration
in the unit (the default is Auto Negotiation)
Wrong Management Make sure all relevant parameters are

VLAN, User Filtering, configured properly
Access to Management..
* If the IP parameters of the unit are unknown, use the Set Factory Defaults utility to restore the default fac-
tory configuration of all parameters (except to Passwords, general FTP parameters and AU's Frequency).
The IP address of the unit after setting to factory defaults is 10.0.0.1.

Appendix F - Troubleshooting SU Association Problems
F.3 SU Association Problems

SU does not associate with Wrong Check proper configuration of basic parameters:
AU configuration
ESSID
Sub-band and frequencies subset
Best AU parameters
ATPC Option
Transmit Power
Maximum Transmit Power
Antenna Gain
Security parameters: Authentication Algorithm,

and Default Key. If necessary-use Promiscuous
Mode in AU.
Access is denied Verify that the SU is not included in MAC Address

by AU Deny List of the AU.
Link quality is too Verify that unit is in coverage area of AU

low according to radio planning.
Verify that antenna is directed toward the AU
Try to improve location/height of antenna.

Appendix F - Troubleshooting Low Throughput Problems
F.4 Low Throughput Problems

Low throughput is suspected Ethernet link problems Verify proper settings of Ethernet operation mode
(actual Ethernet speed of 100 Mbps).
(Check the dominant
Modulation Level in Per rate Check Ethernet counters
Counters and see expected
throughput in the "Expected Wrong configuration of Verify that Maximum Modulation level is not set to a
Throughput" table below) Maximum Modulation value that is not too low according to the
level "Recommended Maximum Modulation Level" table
below.
Low throughput of Non-optimal A value that is too low (see the "Recommended
multicast/broadcast traffic configuration of Maximum Modulation Level" table below) may
Multicast Modulation degrade throughput of broadcast and multicast
level traffic.
High retransmissions rate Interference problems Check for interference using the Spectrum Analysis
(retransmissions rate Mode. If necessary, change the operating frequency
in excess of 15%) of the AU.

Burst Mode Enabled, Concatenation Enabled
Unit TCP Traffic Modulation Level
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SU-1 Uplink 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
Downlink 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
Aggregate 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2

(Bi-directional)
SU-3 Uplink 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9
Downlink 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9
Aggregate 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

(Bi-directional)
SU-6 Uplink 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8
Downlink 4.8 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6
Aggregate 5 6.7 7 7.1 7.1 7.2 7.2 7.2

(Bi-directional)

Appendix F - Troubleshooting Low Throughput Problems

Burst Mode Enabled, Concatenation Enabled
Unit TCP Traffic Modulation Level
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SU-54 Uplink 4.7 6.7 8.9 12.4 15.8 21 25.1 26.4
Downlink 4.8 7.1 9.4 13.7 17.7 24.7 28.9 30.1
Aggregate 4.8 7 9.3 13.1 16.9 22.8 29.4 32

(Bi-directional)
* The throughput results are for net TCP traffic (excluding protocols overheads)
Table F-3: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level*

SNR > 23 dB 8
21 dB < SNR < 23 dB 7
16 dB< SNR < 21 dB 6
13 dB < SNR < 16 dB 5
10 dB < SNR < 13 dB 4
8 dB < SNR < 10 dB 3
7 dB < SNR < 8 dB 2
6 dB < SNR < 7 dB 1

Breeze Access VL Ver.5.5 System Manual - 081124

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Breeze Access VL Ver.5.5 System Manual - 081124

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Breeze Access VL Ver.5.5 System Manual - 081124

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BreezeACCESS ® VL

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

New parameters: User Defined

Per SU Distance Learning New feature SW Version 4.0, July 2006

Lost Beacons Transmission New feature SW Version 4.0, July 2006

New parameters: Service Provider VLAN

BreezeACCESS VL ii System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

Concatenation Improved mechanism. SW Version 4.0, July 2006

Removed: Maximum Number of Frames

IP Precedence Threshold Default value updated SW Version 4.0, July 2006

DSCP Threshold Default value updated SW Version 4.0, July 2006

DRAP support New feature SW Version 4.0, July 2006

Wireless Link Prioritization New feature SW Version 4.0, July 2006

BreezeACCESS VL iii System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

MIB (Appendix E) Updated according to applicable SW Version 4.0, July 2006

MIR/CIR parameters of SU-I Updated SW Version 4.0.27, February

AUS supports also SU-I Updated functionality SW Version 4.0.27, February

BreezeACCESS VL iv System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

AP Client IP Address New feature SW Version 4.0.27, February

Noise Immunity Control New feature SW Version 4.0.27, February

Wireless Rx Events Added Other counter SW Version 4.5, June 2007

Station Allowed Option New feature SW Version 4.5, June 2007

Antenna Compliance Statement New SW Version 4.5, June 2007

Transmit Power Compliance With New SW Version 4.5, June 2007

BreezeACCESS VL v System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

SU "aging" mechanism (removal Updated SW Version 4.5, July 2007

Range of supported modulation Updated description SW Version 4.5, July 2007

FCC Radiation Hazard Warning Updated SW Version 4.5, July 2007

Usable frequencies limitations, Updated SW Version 4.5, July 2007

Basic Parameters Added AP Client IP Address SW Version 4.5, July 2007

Sub-Band Select in SU Added/updated descriptions SW Version 4.5, July 2007

BreezeACCESS VL vi System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

Limitations on usable frequencies Updated SW Version 4.5, August 2007

Sub-Band Select, Frequency, DFS

Spectrum Analysis parameters are

BreezeACCESS VL vii System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

Country Code Parameters New SW Version 5.0, November 2007

AUS An optional license enables support of SW Version 5.0, November 2007

SU "aging" mechanism (removal Updated SW Version 5.0, November 2007

The default has been changed to

 Wireless Link Prioritization Support

BreezeACCESS VL viii System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

Pulse Detection Sensitivity Updated description. SW Version 5.0, December 2007

Antenna Gain Range updated. SW Version 5.0, December 2007

BreezeACCESS VL ix System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

Show Spectrum Analysis Updated manual SW Version 5.1, April 2008

New SU-A-ODU Updated SW Version 5.1, April 2008

Noise Floor Calculation New feature SW Version 5.1, April 2008

SU-V New product SW Version 5.2, May 2008

BreezeACCESS VL x System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

Wireless Link Prioritization Support

This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd. Such

The software described in this document is furnished under a license. The

Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

Any changes or modifications of equipment, including opening of the

Chapter 1 - System description: Describes the BreezeACCESS VL system and

Chapter 2 - Installation: Describes how to install the system components.

Chapter 3 - Commissioning: Describes how to configure basic parameters,

Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration: Describes how to use the

Appendix A - Software Version Loading Using TFTP: Describes how to load a

Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP: Describes how to

Appendix D - Preparing the indoor to outdoor SU cable: Provides details on

Appendix E - Parameters Summary: Provides an at a glance summary of the